From adc93f6097615f16d57e8a24a256302f2144ec4e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: rsc Date: Fri, 14 Jan 2005 17:37:50 +0000 Subject: cut out the html - they're going to cause diffing problems. --- man/man1/9.html | 100 -------- man/man1/9c.html | 172 ------------- man/man1/9p.html | 122 --------- man/man1/9term.html | 259 ------------------- man/man1/INDEX | 5 +- man/man1/acid.html | 486 ----------------------------------- man/man1/acme.1 | 2 +- man/man1/acme.html | 481 ---------------------------------- man/man1/acmeevent.html | 332 ------------------------ man/man1/ascii.html | 159 ------------ man/man1/astro.html | 125 --------- man/man1/basename.html | 63 ----- man/man1/bc.html | 272 -------------------- man/man1/bundle.html | 95 ------- man/man1/cal.html | 81 ------ man/man1/calendar.html | 82 ------ man/man1/cat.html | 126 --------- man/man1/cleanname.html | 65 ----- man/man1/clog.html | 61 ----- man/man1/cmp.html | 84 ------ man/man1/colors.html | 92 ------- man/man1/comm.html | 79 ------ man/man1/core.html | 83 ------ man/man1/crop.html | 127 --------- man/man1/cvs.1 | 2 +- man/man1/date.html | 75 ------ man/man1/db.html | 548 --------------------------------------- man/man1/dc.html | 199 -------------- man/man1/deroff.html | 102 -------- man/man1/dial.html | 67 ----- man/man1/dict.html | 168 ------------ man/man1/diff.html | 141 ---------- man/man1/doctype.html | 88 ------- man/man1/echo.html | 62 ----- man/man1/ed.html | 439 ------------------------------- man/man1/eqn.html | 203 --------------- man/man1/factor.html | 73 ------ man/man1/fmt.html | 100 -------- man/man1/fortune.html | 64 ----- man/man1/freq.html | 69 ----- man/man1/fsize.html | 68 ----- man/man1/grap.html | 232 ----------------- man/man1/graph.html | 117 --------- man/man1/grep.html | 117 --------- man/man1/gview.html | 155 ----------- man/man1/gzip.html | 135 ---------- man/man1/hoc.html | 136 ---------- man/man1/idiff.html | 87 ------- man/man1/index.html | 449 -------------------------------- man/man1/intro.html | 221 ---------------- man/man1/join.html | 144 ----------- man/man1/jpg.html | 175 ------------- man/man1/kill.html | 96 ------- man/man1/label.html | 117 --------- man/man1/lex.html | 110 -------- man/man1/look.html | 96 ------- man/man1/ls.html | 121 --------- man/man1/man.html | 139 ---------- man/man1/map.html | 483 ---------------------------------- man/man1/mc.html | 64 ----- man/man1/mk.1 | 2 +- man/man1/mk.html | 621 -------------------------------------------- man/man1/mkdir.html | 79 ------ man/man1/namespace.html | 61 ----- man/man1/news.html | 91 ------- man/man1/p.html | 63 ----- man/man1/page.html | 97 ------- man/man1/pic.html | 435 ------------------------------- man/man1/plot.html | 88 ------- man/man1/plumb.html | 80 ------ man/man1/pr.html | 90 ------- man/man1/proof.html | 119 --------- man/man1/ps.html | 95 ------- man/man1/psfonts.html | 148 ----------- man/man1/pwd.html | 73 ------ man/man1/rc.html | 655 ----------------------------------------------- man/man1/rio.html | 172 ------------- man/man1/rm.html | 66 ----- man/man1/sam.html | 577 ----------------------------------------- man/man1/scat.html | 385 ---------------------------- man/man1/secstore.html | 145 ----------- man/man1/sed.html | 300 ---------------------- man/man1/seq.html | 99 ------- man/man1/sleep.html | 91 ------- man/man1/sort.html | 200 --------------- man/man1/spell.html | 125 --------- man/man1/split.html | 91 ------- man/man1/src.html | 99 ------- man/man1/stats.html | 214 ---------------- man/man1/strings.html | 69 ----- man/man1/sum.html | 92 ------- man/man1/tail.html | 116 --------- man/man1/tbl.html | 187 -------------- man/man1/tcs.html | 131 ---------- man/man1/tee.html | 56 ---- man/man1/test.html | 156 ----------- man/man1/time.html | 63 ----- man/man1/touch.html | 69 ----- man/man1/tr.html | 107 -------- man/man1/tr2post.html | 152 ----------- man/man1/troff.html | 126 --------- man/man1/troff2html.1 | 15 +- man/man1/troff2html.html | 108 -------- man/man1/tweak.html | 194 -------------- man/man1/uniq.html | 79 ------ man/man1/units.html | 156 ----------- man/man1/vac.html | 160 ------------ man/man1/wc.html | 75 ------ man/man1/web.html | 115 --------- man/man1/wintext.html | 124 --------- man/man1/xd.html | 99 ------- man/man1/yacc.html | 170 ------------ 112 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 17179 deletions(-) delete mode 100644 man/man1/9.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/9c.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/9p.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/9term.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/acid.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/acme.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/acmeevent.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/ascii.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/astro.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/basename.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/bc.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/bundle.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/cal.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/calendar.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/cat.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/cleanname.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/clog.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/cmp.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/colors.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/comm.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/core.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/crop.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/date.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/db.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/dc.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/deroff.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/dial.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/dict.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/diff.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/doctype.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/echo.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/ed.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/eqn.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/factor.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/fmt.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/fortune.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/freq.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/fsize.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/grap.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/graph.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/grep.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/gview.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/gzip.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/hoc.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/idiff.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/index.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/intro.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/join.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/jpg.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/kill.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/label.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/lex.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/look.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/ls.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/man.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/map.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/mc.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/mk.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/mkdir.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/namespace.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/news.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/p.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/page.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/pic.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/plot.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/plumb.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/pr.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/proof.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/ps.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/psfonts.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/pwd.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/rc.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/rio.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/rm.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/sam.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/scat.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/secstore.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/sed.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/seq.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/sleep.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/sort.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/spell.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/split.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/src.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/stats.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/strings.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/sum.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tail.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tbl.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tcs.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tee.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/test.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/time.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/touch.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tr.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tr2post.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/troff.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/troff2html.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/tweak.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/uniq.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/units.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/vac.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/wc.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/web.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/wintext.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/xd.html delete mode 100644 man/man1/yacc.html (limited to 'man/man1') diff --git a/man/man1/9.html b/man/man1/9.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1ddef719..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ - -9(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9(1)9(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9 – run Plan 9 commands
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9 cmd [ args ... ] -
- - . 9
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Because Plan 9 supplies commands with the same name as but different - behavior than many basic Unix system commands (e.g., grep, sed, - mkdir, rm), it is not recommended to run with the Plan 9 bin directory - ahead of the system directories. -
- - 9 is a shell script that sets up a Plan 9 environment and runs - cmd . It sets $PLAN9 and adds $PLAN9/bin to the beginning of $PATH - before running cmd. -
- - If run with no arguments, 9 does not do anything. This is so that - it can be invoked from sh-style shells using . 9 in order to make - the current shell start running in the Plan 9 environment.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Search for greek in the password file:
- -
- - $ 9 grep '[α−ζ]' /etc/passwd
- -
- - -
- Start an rc(1) with the Plan 9 commands in the path before the - system commands.
- -
- - 9 rc
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/9c.html b/man/man1/9c.html deleted file mode 100644 index 894a34ae..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9c.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ - -9c(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9C(1)9C(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9c, 9a, 9l, 9ar – C compiler, assembler, linker, archiver
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9c [ −I path ] [ −D name ] file ... -
- - 9a file ... -
- - 9l [ -o target ] object ... [ library ... ] [ −Lpath ... ] [ −lname - ... ] -
- - 9ar key [ posname ] afile [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These programs are shell scripts that invoke the appropriate standard - tools for the current operating system and architecture. One can - use them to write portable recipes for mkfiles. -
- - 9c compiles the named C files into object files for the current - system. The system C compiler is invoked with warnings enabled. - The −I option adds path to the include path, and the −D option - defines name in the C preprocessor. 9c always defines the symbol - PLAN9PORT defined in the C preprocessor and adds - $PLAN9/include to the include path. -
- - 9c also defines __sun__ on SunOS systems and __Linux26__ on Linux - systems with 2.6-series kernels. -
- - 9a assembles the named files into object files for the current - system. Unlike some system assemblers, it does not promise to - run the C preprocessor on the source files. -
- - 9l links the named object files and libraries to create the target - executable. Each −l option specifies that a library named libname.a - be found and linked. The −L option adds directories to the library - search path. 9l invokes the system linker with $PLAN9/lib already - on the library search path. -
- - 9l searches the named objects and libraries for symbols of the - form __p9l_autolib_name, which it takes as indication that it - should link $PLAN9/lib/libname.a as well. It also examines such - libraries to find their own dependencies. A single −l option at - the beginning of the command line disables this - behavior. The symbol __p9l_autolib_name is added to an object - file by the macro AUTOLIB( name ), defined in <u.h>. Header files - associated with libraries contain AUTOLIB annotations; ordinary - programs need not use them. Due to shortcomings in the implementation, - a source file may not contain the - same AUTOLIB statement multiple times. -
- - 9ar maintains object file archives called libraries. The exact - set of valid command keys varies from system to system, but 9ar - always provides the following key characters:
- d     Delete files from the archive file.
- r     Replace files in the archive file, or add them if missing.
- t     List a table of contents of the archive. If names are given, - only those files are listed.
- x     Extract the named files. If no names are given, all files in - the archive are extracted. In neither case does x alter the archive - file.
- v     Verbose. Give a file-by-file description of the making of a new - archive file from the old archive and the constituent files. With - t, give a long listing of all information about the files, somewhat - like a listing by ls(1), showing
- -
- - -
- - mode uid/gid size date name
- -
- -
- c     Create. Normally 9ar will create a new archive when afile does - not exist, and give a warning. Option c discards any old contents - and suppresses the warning. -
- - When a d, r, or m key is specified, 9ar inserts a table of contents, - required by the linker, at the front of the library. The table - of contents is rebuilt whenever the archive is modified.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - 9c file1.c file2.c file3.c
- -
- - Compile three C source files.
- -
- 9a file4.s
- -
- - Assemble one assembler source file.
- -
- 9ar rvc lib.a file[12].o
- -
- - Archive the first two object files into a library.
- -
- 9l −o prog file3.o file4.o lib.a
- -
- - Link the final two object files and any necessary objects from - the library into an executable.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/9p.html b/man/man1/9p.html deleted file mode 100644 index 449d0eb5..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9p.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ - -9p(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P(1)9P(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9p – read and write files on a 9P server
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9p [ −a addr ] read path
- 9p [ −a addr ] readfd path -
- - 9p [ −a addr ] write path
- 9p [ −a addr ] writefd path -
- - 9p [ −a addr ] stat path
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - 9p is a trivial 9P client that can access a single file on a 9P - server. It can be useful for manual interaction with a 9P server - or for accessing simple 9P services from within shell scripts. - -
- - The first argument is a command, one of:
- readprint the contents of path to standard output
- write
- -
- - write data on standard input to path
- -
- readfd, writefd
- -
- - like read and write but use openfd(9p) instead of open; this masks - errors and is mainly useful for debugging the implementation of - openfd
- -
- statexecute stat (9p) on path and print the result -
- - 9p dials address to connect to the 9P server. If the −a option - is not given, 9p requires the path to be of the form service/subpath; - it connects to the Unix domain socket service in the name space - directory (see intro(4)) and then accesses subpath.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To update plumber(4)’s copy of your plumbing rules after editing - $HOME/lib/plumbing:
- -
- - cat $HOME/lib/plumbing | 9p write plumb/rules
- -
- - -
- To display the contents of the current acme(4) window:
- -
- - 9p read acme/$winid/body
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9p.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4), intro(9p), 9pclient(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/9term.html b/man/man1/9term.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7d6a741f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9term.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,259 +0,0 @@ - -9term(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9TERM(1)9TERM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9term – terminal windows
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9term [ −as ] [ −f font ] [ cmd ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - 9term is a terminal window program for the X Window System, providing - an interface similar to that used on Plan 9.
-

Command
- The 9term command starts a new window. -
- - The −a flag causes button 2 to send the selection immediately, - like acme. Otherwise button 2 brings up a menu, described below. - -
- - The −s option initializes windows so that text scrolls; the default - is not to scroll. -
- - The font argument to −f names a font used to display text, both - in 9term’s menus and as a default for any programs running in - its windows; it also establishes the environment variable $font. - If −f is not given, 9term uses the imported value of $font if - set; otherwise it uses the graphics system default. -
- - 9term runs the given command in the window, or $SHELL if no command - is given.
-

Text windows
- Characters typed on the keyboard collect in the window to form - a long, continuous document. -
- - There is always some selected text, a contiguous string marked - on the screen by reversing its color. If the selected text is - a null string, it is indicated by a hairline cursor between two - characters. The selected text may be edited by mousing and typing. - Text is selected by pointing and clicking button 1 to make a null- - string selection, or by pointing, then sweeping with button 1 - pressed. Text may also be selected by double-clicking: just inside - a matched delimiter-pair with one of {[(<`'" on the left and }])>`'" - on the right, it selects all text within the pair; at the beginning - or end of a line, it selects the line; within or at the - edge of an alphanumeric word, it selects the word. -
- - Characters typed on the keyboard replace the selected text; if - this text is not empty, it is placed in a snarf buffer common - to all windows but distinct from that of sam(1). -
- - Programs access the text in the window at a single point maintained - automatically by 9term. The output point is the location in the - text where the next character written by a program to the terminal - will appear; afterwards, the output point is the null string beyond - the new character. The output point is also the location - in the text of the next character that will be read (directly - from the text in the window, not from an intervening buffer) by - a program. Since Unix does not make it possible to know when a - program is reading the terminal, lines are sent as they are completed - (when the user types a newline character). -
- - In general there is text in the window after the output point, - usually placed there by typing but occasionally by the editing - operations described below. A pending read of the terminal will - block until the text after the output point contains a newline, - whereupon the read may acquire the text, up to and including the - newline. After the read, as described above, the output point - will be at the beginning of the next line of text. In normal circumstances, - therefore, typed text is delivered to programs a line at a time. - Changes made by typing or editing before the text is read will - not be seen by the program reading it. Because of the - Unix issues mentioned above, a line of text is only editable until - it is completed with a newline character, or when hold mode (see - below) is enabled. -
- - Even when there are newlines in the output text, 9term will not - honor reads if the window is in hold mode, which is indicated - by a white cursor and blue text and border. The ESC character - toggles hold mode. Some programs automatically turn on hold mode - to simplify the editing of multi-line text; type ESC when done - to allow mail to read the text. -
- - An EOT character (control-D) behaves exactly like newline except - that it is not delivered to a program when read. Thus on an empty - line an EOT serves to deliver an end-of-file indication: the read - will return zero characters. The BS character (control-H) erases - the character before the selected text. The ETB character - (control-W) erases any nonalphanumeric characters, then the alphanumeric - word just before the selected text. ‘Alphanumeric’ here means - non-blanks and non-punctuation. The NAK character (control-U) - erases the text after the output point, and not yet read by a - program, but not more than one line. All these - characters are typed on the keyboard and hence replace the selected - text; for example, typing a BS with a word selected places the - word in the snarf buffer, removes it from the screen, and erases - the character before the word. -
- - An ACK character (control-F) or Insert character triggers file - name completion for the preceding string (see complete(3)). -
- - Text may be moved vertically within the window. A scroll bar on - the left of the window shows in its clear portion what fragment - of the total output text is visible on the screen, and in its - gray part what is above or below view; it measures characters, - not lines. Mousing inside the scroll bar moves text: clicking - button 1 - with the mouse pointing inside the scroll bar brings the line - at the top of the window to the cursor’s vertical location; button - 3 takes the line at the cursor to the top of the window; button - 2, treating the scroll bar as a ruler, jumps to the indicated - portion of the stored text. Holding a button pressed in the scroll - bar will - cause the text to scroll continuously until the button is released. - -
- - Typing down-arrow scrolls forward one third of a window, and up-arrow - scrolls back. Typing page-down scrolls forward two thirds of a - window, and page-up scrolls back. Typing Home scrolls to the top - of the window; typing End scrolls to the end. -
- - The DEL character sends an interrupt note to all processes in - the window’s process group. Unlike the other characters, the DEL - and arrow keys do not affect the selected text. The left (right) - arrow key moves the selection to one character before (after) - the current selection. -
- - 9term relies on the kernel’s terminal processing to handle EOT - and DEL, so the terminal must be set up with EOT as the “eof” - character and DEL as the “intr” character. 9term runs stty(1) - to establish this when the terminal is created. -
- - Normally, written output to a window blocks when the text reaches - the end of the screen and the terminal buffer fills; a button - 2 menu item toggles scrolling. -
- - 9term changes behavior according to the terminal settings of the - running programs. Most programs run with echo enabled. In this - mode, 9term displays and allows editing of the input. Some programs, - typically those reading passwords, run with echo disabled. In - this mode, 9term passes keystrokes through directly, - without echoing them or buffering until a newline character. These - heuristics work well in many cases, but there are a few common - ones where they fall short. First, programs using the GNU readline - library typically disable terminal echo and perform echoing themselves. - The most common example is the shell - bash(1). Disabling the use of readline with “set +o emacs” [sic] - usually restores the desired behavior. Second, remote terminal - programs such as ssh(1) typically run with echo disabled, relying - on the remote system to echo characters as desired. Plan 9’s ssh - has a −C flag to disable this, leaving the terminal in - “cooked” mode. For similar situations on Unix, 9term’s button - 2 menu has an entry to toggle the forced use of cooked mode, despite - the terminal settings. In such cases, it is useful to run “stty - −echo” on the remote system to avoid seeing your input twice. - -
- - Editing operations are selected from a menu on button 2. The cut - operation deletes the selected text from the screen and puts it - in the snarf buffer; snarf copies the selected text to the buffer - without deleting it; paste replaces the selected text with the - contents of the buffer; and send copies the snarf buffer to - just after the output point, adding a final newline if missing. - Paste will sometimes and send will always place text after the - output point; the text so placed will behave exactly as described - above. Therefore when pasting text containing newlines after the - output point, it may be prudent to turn on hold mode first. -
- - The plumb menu item sends the contents of the selection (not the - snarf buffer) to the plumber (see plumb(1)). If the selection - is empty, it sends the white-space-delimited text containing the - selection (typing cursor). A typical use of this feature is to - tell the editor to find the source of an error by plumbing the - file and - line information in a compiler’s diagnostic. -
- - Each 9term listens for connections on a Unix socket. When a client - connects, the 9term writes the window contents to the client and - then hangs up. 9term installs the name of this socket in the environment - as $text9term before running cmd.
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9term
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There should be a program to toggle the current window’s hold - mode. -
- - Unix makes everything harder.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - wintext(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/INDEX b/man/man1/INDEX index 629dc654..5a890303 100644 --- a/man/man1/INDEX +++ b/man/man1/INDEX @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ 0intro 0intro.1 intro 0intro.1 9 9.1 +9.rc 9.1 9a 9c.1 9ar 9c.1 9c 9c.1 @@ -35,6 +36,7 @@ comm comm.1 core core.1 crop crop.1 iconv crop.1 +cvs cvs.1 date date.1 db db.1 dc dc.1 @@ -99,8 +101,9 @@ map map.1 mapd map.1 mapdemo map.1 mc mc.1 -membername mk.1 mk mk.1 +dump9660 mk9660.1 +mk9660 mk9660.1 mkdir mkdir.1 namespace namespace.1 news news.1 diff --git a/man/man1/acid.html b/man/man1/acid.html deleted file mode 100644 index f04c9baa..00000000 --- a/man/man1/acid.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,486 +0,0 @@ - -acid(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACID(1)ACID(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acid, acidtypes – debugger
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - acid [ −l library ] [ −wq ] [ −m machine ] [ pid | core ] [ textfile - ] -
- - acidtypes [ −p prefix ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Acid is a programmable symbolic debugger. It can inspect one or - more processes that share an address space. A program to be debugged - may be specified by the process id of a running or defunct process, - or by the name of the program’s text file (a.out by default). - At the prompt, acid will store function definitions - or print the value of expressions. Options are
- −w         Allow the textfile to be modified.
- −q         Print variable renamings at startup.
- −l library    Load from library at startup; see below.
- −m machine   Assume instructions are for the given CPU type (see - mach(3)) instead of using the executable header to select the - CPU type.
- −k         Debug the kernel state for the process, rather than the user - state. -
- - At startup, acid obtains standard function definitions from the - library file /usr/local/plan9/acid/port, architecture-dependent - functions from /usr/local/plan9/acid/$objtype, user-specified - functions from $home/lib/acid, and further functions from −l files. - Definitions in any file may - override previously defined functions. If the function acidinit() - is defined, it will be invoked after all modules have been loaded. - Then the function acidmap() will be invoked if defined. /usr/local/plan9/acid/port - provides a definition of acidmap that attaches all the shared - libraries being used by the target - process and then runs acidtypes (q.v.) to create acid functions - for examining data structures.
-

Language
- Symbols of the program being debugged become integer variables - whose values are addresses. Contents of addresses are obtained - by indirection. Local variables are qualified by function name, - for example main:argv. When program symbols conflict with acid - words, distinguishing $ signs are prefixed. Such - renamings are reported at startup; option −q suppresses them. - -
- - Variable types (integer, float, list, string) and formats are - inferred from assignments. Truth values false/true are attributed - to zero/nonzero integers or floats and to empty/nonempty lists - or strings. Lists are sequences of expressions surrounded by {} - and separated by commas. -
- - Expressions are much as in C, but yield both a value and a format. - Casts to complex types are allowed. Lists admit the following - operators, with subscripts counted from 0.
- -
- - head list
- tail list
- append list, element
- delete list, subscript -
- - -
- Format codes are the same as in db(1). Formats may be attached - to (unary) expressions with \, e.g. (32*7)\D. There are two indirection - operators, * to address a core image, @ to address a text file. - The type and format of the result are determined by the format - of the operand, whose type must be integer. -
- - Statements are
- -
- - if expr then statement [ else statement ]
- while expr do statement
- loop expr, expr do statement
- defn name(args) { statement }
- defn name
- name(args)
- builtin name(args)
- local name
- return expr
- whatis [ name ] -
- - -
- The statement defn name clears the definition for name. A defn - may override a built-in function; prefixing a function call with - builtin ignores any overriding defn, forcing the use of the built-in - function. -
- - Here is a partial list of functions; see the manual for a complete - list.
- stk()          Print a stack trace for current process.
- lstk()         Print a stack trace with values of local variables.
- gpr()          Print general registers. Registers can also be accessed by - name, for example *R0.
- spr()          Print special registers such as program counter and stack - pointer.
- fpr()          Print floating-point registers.
- regs()         Same as spr();gpr().
- fmt(expr,format)
- -
- - -
- - Expression expr with format given by the character value of expression - format.
- -
- -
- src(address)     Print 10 lines of source around the program address.
- Bsrc(address)    Get the source line for the program address into - a window of a running sam(1) and select it.
- line(address)    Print source line nearest to the program address.
- source()       List current source directories.
- addsrcdir(string)
- -
- - -
- - Add a source directory to the list.
- -
- -
- filepc(where)   Convert a string of the form sourcefile:linenumber - to a machine address.
- pcfile(address)Convert a machine address to a source file name.
- pcline(address)Convert a machine address to a source line number.
- bptab()        List breakpoints set in the current process.
- bpset(address)   Set a breakpoint in the current process at the given - address. (Doesn’t work on Unix yet.)
- bpdel(address)   Delete a breakpoint from the current process.
- cont()         Continue execution of current process and wait for it to - stop.
- step()         Execute a single machine instruction in the current process. - (Doesn’t work on Unix yet.)
- func()         Step repeatedly until after a function return.
- stopped(pid)    This replaceable function is called automatically - when the given process stops. It normally prints the program counter - and returns to the prompt.
- asm(address)     Disassemble 30 machine instructions beginning at the - given address.
- mem(address,string)
- -
- - -
- - Print a block of memory interpreted according to a string of format - codes.
- -
- -
- dump(address,n,string)
- -
- - -
- - Like mem(), repeated for n consecutive blocks.
- -
- -
- print(expr,...)   Print the values of the expressions.
- newproc(arguments)
- -
- - -
- - Start a new process with arguments given as a string and halt - at the first instruction.
- -
- -
- new()          Like newproc(), but take arguments (except argv[0]) from - string variable progargs.
- win()          Like new(), but run the process in a separate window.
- start(pid)      Start a stopped process.
- kill(pid)       Kill the given process.
- setproc(pid)    Make the given process current.
- rc(string)       Escape to the shell, rc(1), to execute the command string.
- include(string)Read acid commands from the named file.
- includepipe(string)
- -
- - -
- - Run the command string, reading its standard output as acid commands.
- -
- -
-

Shared library segments
- When a pid or core file is specified on the command line, acid - will, as part of its startup, determine the set of shared libraries - in use by the process image and map those at appropriate locations. - If acid is started without a pid or core file and is subsequently - attached to a process via setproc, the shared library maps - can be initialized by calling dynamicmap().
-

Type information
- Unix compilers conventionally include detailed type information - in the debugging symbol section of binaries. The external program - acidtypes extracts this information and formats it as acid program - text. Once the shared libraries have been mapped, the default - acid startup invokes acidtypes (via - includepipe) on the set of currently mapped text files. The function - acidtypes() can be called to rerun the command after changing - the set of mapped text files.
-

Acid Libraries
- There are a number of acid ‘libraries’ that provide higher-level - debugging facilities. One notable example is trump, which uses - acid to trace memory allocation. Trump requires starting acid - on the program, either by attaching to a running process or by - executing new() on a binary (perhaps after setting progargs), - stopping the process, and then running trump() to execute the - program under the scaffolding. The output will be a trace of the - memory allocation and free calls executed by the program. When - finished tracing, stop the process and execute untrump() followed - by cont() to resume execution. - -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Start to debug /bin/ls; set some breakpoints; run up to the first - one (this example doesn’t work on Unix yet):
- -
- - % acid /bin/ls
- /bin/ls: mips plan 9 executable
- /sys/lib/acid/port
- /sys/lib/acid/mips
- acid: new()
- 70094: system call    _main       ADD    $−0x14,R29
- 70094: breakpoint     main+0x4    MOVW R31,0x0(R29)
- acid: pid
- 70094
- acid: argv0 = **main:argv\s
- acid: whatis argv0
- integer variable format s
- acid: *argv0
- /bin/ls
- acid: bpset(ls)
- acid: cont()
- 70094: breakpoint    ls      ADD    $−0x16c8,R29
- acid:
- -
- - -
- Display elements of a linked list of structures:
- -
- - complex Str { 'D' 0 val; 'X' 4 next; };
- s = *headstr;
- while s != 0 do{
- -
- - complex Str s;
- print(s.val, "\n");
- s = s.next;
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Note the use of the . operator instead of −>. -
- - Display an array of bytes declared in C as char array[].
- -
- - *(array\s)
- -
- - -
- This example gives array string format, then prints the string - beginning at the address (in acid notation) *array. -
- - Trace the system calls executed by ls(1) (neither does this one):
- -
- - % acid −l truss /bin/ls
- /bin/ls:386 plan 9 executable
- /sys/lib/acid/port
- /sys/lib/acid/kernel
- /sys/lib/acid/truss
- /sys/lib/acid/386
- acid: progargs = "−l lib/profile"
- acid: new()
- acid: truss()
- open("#c/pid", 0)
- -
- - return value: 3
- -
- pread(3, 0x7fffeeac, 20, −1)
- -
- - return value: 12
- data: "          166 "
- -
- ...
- stat("lib/profile", 0x0000f8cc, 113)
- -
- - return value: 65
- -
- open("/env/timezone", 0)
- -
- - return value: 3
- -
- pread(3, 0x7fffd7c4, 1680, −1)
- -
- - return value: 1518
- data: "EST −18000 EDT −14400
- 9943200     25664400     41392800     57718800     73447200     89168400
- 104896800    ..."
- -
- close(3)
- -
- - return value: 0
- -
- pwrite(1, "−−rw−rw−r−− M 9 rob rob 2519 Mar 22 10:29 lib/profile
- ", 54, −1)
- −−rw−rw−r−− M 9 rob rob 2519 Mar 22 10:29 lib/profile
- -
- - return value: 54
- -
- ...
- 166: breakpoint       _exits+0x5       INTB $0x40
- acid: cont()
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/acid/$objtype
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/port
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/kernel
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/trump
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/truss
- $home/lib/acid
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acid
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mk(1), db(1)
- Phil Winterbottom, “Acid Manual”.
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - At termination, kill commands are proposed for processes that - are still active.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is no way to redirect the standard input and standard output - of a new process. -
- - Source line selection near the beginning of a file may pick an - adjacent file. -
- - With the extant stepping commands, one cannot step through instructions - outside the text segment and it is hard to debug across process - forks. -
- - Breakpoints do not work yet. Therefore, commands such as step, - new, and truss do not work either. New in particular will need - some help to cope with dynamic libraries.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/acme.1 b/man/man1/acme.1 index df01fcad..b2007ed1 100644 --- a/man/man1/acme.1 +++ b/man/man1/acme.1 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The .RB ( -F ) option sets the main font, usually variable-pitch (alternate, usually fixed-pitch); the default is -.B /usr/local/plan9/font/lucidasans/euro.8.font +.B \*9/font/lucidasans/euro.8.font .RB ( \&.../lucm/unicode.9.font ). Tab intervals are set to the width of 4 (or the value of .BR $tabstop ) diff --git a/man/man1/acme.html b/man/man1/acme.html deleted file mode 100644 index bc1063bd..00000000 --- a/man/man1/acme.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,481 +0,0 @@ - -acme(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACME(1)ACME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acme, win, awd – interactive text windows
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - acme [ −f varfont ] [ −F fixfont ] [ −c ncol ] [ −br ] [ −l file - | file ... ] -
- - win [ command ] -
- - awd [ label ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Acme manages windows of text that may be edited interactively - or by external programs. The interactive interface uses the keyboard - and mouse; external programs use a set of files served by acme; - these are discussed in acme(4). -
- - Any named files are read into acme windows before acme accepts - input. With the −l option, the state of the entire system is loaded - from file, which should have been created by a Dump command (q.v.), - and subsequent file names are ignored. Plain files display as - text; directories display as columnated lists of the - names of their components, as in ls −p directory|mc except that - the names of subdirectories have a slash appended. -
- - The −f (−F) option sets the main font, usually variable-pitch - (alternate, usually fixed-pitch); the default is /usr/local/plan9/font/lucidasans/euro.8.font - (.../lucm/unicode.9.font). Tab intervals are set to the width - of 4 (or the value of $tabstop) numeral zeros in the appropriate - font. -
- -

Windows
- Acme windows are in two parts: a one-line tag above a multi-line - body. The body typically contains an image of a file, as in sam(1), - or the output of a program, as in an rio(1) window. The tag contains - a number of blank-separated words, followed by a vertical bar - character, followed by anything. The first word is the - name of the window, typically the name of the associated file - or directory, and the other words are commands available in that - window. Any text may be added after the bar; examples are strings - to search for or commands to execute in that window. Changes to - the text left of the bar will be ignored, unless the result is - to change the name of the window. -
- - If a window holds a directory, the name (first word of the tag) - will end with a slash.
-

Scrolling
- Each window has a scroll bar to the left of the body. The scroll - bar behaves much as in sam(1) or rio(1) except that scrolling - occurs when the button is pressed, rather than released, and continues - as long as the mouse button is held down in the scroll bar. For - example, to scroll slowly through a file, hold button 3 - down near the top of the scroll bar. Moving the mouse down the - scroll bar speeds up the rate of scrolling. (The experimental - option −r reverses the scrolling behavior of buttons 1 and 3, - to behave more like xterm(1).)
-

Layout
- Acme windows are arranged in columns. By default, it creates two - columns when starting; this can be overridden with the −c option. - Placement is automatic but may be adjusted using the layout box - in the upper left corner of each window and column. Pressing and - holding any mouse button in the box drags the - associated window or column. For windows, just clicking in the - layout box grows the window in place: button 1 grows it a little, - button 2 grows it as much as it can, still leaving all other tags - in that column visible, and button 3 takes over the column completely, - temporarily hiding other windows in the column. (They - will return en masse if any of them needs attention.) The layout - box in a window is normally white; when it is black in the center, - it records that the file is ‘dirty’: acme believes it is modified - from its original contents. -
- - Tags exist at the top of each column and across the whole display. - Acme pre-loads them with useful commands. Also, the tag across - the top maintains a list of executing long-running commands.
-

Typing
- The behavior of typed text is similar to that in rio(1) except - that the characters are delivered to the tag or body under the - mouse; there is no ‘click to type’. (The experimental option −b - causes typing to go to the most recently clicked-at or made window.) - The usual backspacing conventions apply. As in sam(1) but not - rio, the ESC key selects the text typed since the last mouse action, - a feature particularly useful when executing commands. A side - effect is that typing ESC with text already selected is identical - to a Cut command (q.v.). -
- - Most text, including the names of windows, may be edited uniformly. - The only exception is that the command names to the left of the - bar in a tag are maintained automatically; changes to them are - repaired by acme.
-

Directory context
- Each window’s tag names a directory: explicitly if the window - holds a directory; implicitly if it holds a regular file (e.g. - the directory /adm if the window holds /adm/users). This directory - provides a context for interpreting file names in that window. - For example, the string users in a window labeled /adm/ or - /adm/keys will be interpreted as the file name /adm/users. The - directory is defined purely textually, so it can be a non-existent - directory or a real directory associated with a non-existent file - (e.g. /adm/not−a−file). File names beginning with a slash are - assumed to be absolute file names. -

Errors
- Windows whose names begin with − or + conventionally hold diagnostics - and other data not directly associated with files. A window labeled - +Errors receives all diagnostics produced by acme itself. Diagnostics - from commands run by acme appear in a window named directory/+Errors - where directory is - identified by the context of the command. These error windows - are created when needed.
-

Mouse button 1
- Mouse button 1 selects text just as in sam(1) or rio(1), including - the usual double-clicking conventions.
-

Mouse button 2
- By an action similar to selecting text with button 1, button 2 - indicates text to execute as a command. If the indicated text - has multiple white-space-separated words, the first is the command - name and the second and subsequent are its arguments. If button - 2 is ‘clicked’--indicates a null string--acme expands the - indicated text to find a command to run: if the click is within - button-1-selected text, acme takes that selection as the command; - otherwise it takes the largest string of valid file name characters - containing the click. Valid file name characters are alphanumerics - and _ . − + /. This behavior is similar to double-clicking - with button 1 but, because a null command is meaningless, only - a single click is required. -
- - Some commands, all by convention starting with a capital letter, - are built-ins that are executed directly by acme:
- Cut   Delete most recently selected text and place in snarf buffer.
- Del   Delete window. If window is dirty, instead print a warning; - a second Del will succeed.
- Delcol
- -
- - Delete column and all its windows, after checking that windows - are not dirty.
- -
- Delete
- -
- - Delete window without checking for dirtiness.
- -
- DumpWrite the state of acme to the file name, if specified, or - $home/acme.dump by default.
- EditTreat the argument as a text editing command in the style - of sam(1). The full Sam language is implemented except for the - commands k, n, q, and !. The = command is slightly different: - it includes the file name and gives only the line address unless - the command is explicitly =#. The ‘current window’ for the - -
- - command is the body of the window in which the Edit command is - executed. Usually the Edit command would be typed in a tag; longer - commands may be prepared in a scratch window and executed, with - Edit itself in the current window, using the 2-1 chord described - below. - -
- ExitExit acme after checking that windows are not dirty.
- FontWith no arguments, change the font of the associated window - from fixed-spaced to proportional-spaced or vice versa. Given - a file name argument, change the font of the window to that stored - in the named file. If the file name argument is prefixed by var - (fix), also set the default proportional-spaced - -
- - (fixed-spaced) font for future use to that font. Other existing - windows are unaffected.
- -
- Get   Load file into window, replacing previous contents (after checking - for dirtiness as in Del). With no argument, use the existing file - name of the window. Given an argument, use that file but do not - change the window’s file name.
- ID    Print window ID number (q.v.).
- InclWhen opening ‘include’ files (those enclosed in <>) with button - 3, acme searches in directories /$objtype/include and /sys/include. - Incl adds its arguments to a supplementary list of include directories, - analogous to the −I option to the compilers. This list is per-window - and is inherited when - -
- - windows are created by actions in that window, so Incl is most - usefully applied to a directory containing relevant source. With - no arguments, Incl prints the supplementary list. This command - is largely superseded by plumbing (see plumb(7)).
- -
- KillSend a kill note to acme-initiated commands named as arguments.
- Local
- -
- - In the Plan 9 acme, this prefix causes a command to be run in - acme’sown file name space and environment variable group. On Unix - this is impossible. Local is recognized as a prefix, but has no - effect on the command being executed.
- -
- LoadRestore the state of acme from a file (default $home/acme.dump) - created by the Dump command.
- LookSearch in body for occurrence of literal text indicated by - the argument or, if none is given, by the selected text in the - body.
- New   Make new window. With arguments, load the named files into - windows.
- Newcol
- -
- - Make new column.
- -
- Paste
- -
- - Replace most recently selected text with contents of snarf buffer.
- -
- Put   Write window to the named file. With no argument, write to - the file named in the tag of the window.
- Putall
- -
- - Write all dirty windows whose names indicate existing regular - files.
- -
- RedoComplement of Undo.
- SendAppend selected text or snarf buffer to end of body; used - mainly with win.
- Snarf
- -
- - Place selected text in snarf buffer.
- -
- SortArrange the windows in the column from top to bottom in lexicographical - order based on their names.
- Tab   Set the width of tab stops for this window to the value of - the argument, in units of widths of the zero character. With no - arguments, it prints the current value.
- UndoUndo last textual change or set of changes.
- Zerox
- -
- - Create a copy of the window containing most recently selected - text. -
- - -
- A common place to store text for commands is in the tag; in fact - acme maintains a set of commands appropriate to the state of the - window to the left of the bar in the tag. -
- - If the text indicated with button 2 is not a recognized built-in, - it is executed as a shell command. For example, indicating date - with button 2 runs date(1). The standard and error outputs of - commands are sent to the error window associated with the directory - from which the command was run, which will be created if - necessary. For example, in a window /etc/passwd executing pwd - will produce the output /etc in a (possibly newly-created) window - labeled /etc/+Errors; in a window containing /home/rob/sam/sam.c - executing mk will run mk(1) in /home/rob/sam, producing output - in a window labeled - /home/rob/sam/+Errors. The environment of such commands contains - the variable $% with value set to the filename of the window in - which the command is run, and $winid set to the window’s id number - (see acme(4)).
-

Mouse button 3
- Pointing at text with button 3 instructs acme to locate or acquire - the file, string, etc. described by the indicated text and its - context. This description follows the actions taken when button - 3 is released after sweeping out some text. In the description, - text refers to the text of the original sweep or, if it was null, - the - result of applying the same expansion rules that apply to button - 2 actions. -
- - If the text names an existing window, acme moves the mouse cursor - to the selected text in the body of that window. If the text names - an existing file with no associated window, acme loads the file - into a new window and moves the mouse there. If the text is a - file name contained in angle brackets, acme loads the - indicated include file from the directory appropriate to the suffix - of the file name of the window holding the text. (The Incl command - adds directories to the standard list.) -
- - If the text begins with a colon, it is taken to be an address, - in the style of sam(1), within the body of the window containing - the text. The address is evaluated, the resulting text highlighted, - and the mouse moved to it. Thus, in acme, one must type :/regexp - or :127 not just /regexp or 127. (There is an easier - way to locate literal text; see below.) -
- - If the text is a file name followed by a colon and an address, - acme loads the file and evaluates the address. For example, clicking - button 3 anywhere in the text file.c:27 will open file.c, select - line 27, and put the mouse at the beginning of the line. The rules - about Error files, directories, and so on all combine - to make this an efficient way to investigate errors from compilers, - etc. -
- - If the text is not an address or file, it is taken to be literal - text, which is then searched for in the body of the window in - which button 3 was clicked. If a match is found, it is selected - and the mouse is moved there. Thus, to search for occurrences - of a word in a file, just click button 3 on the word. Because - of the rule of - using the selection as the button 3 action, subsequent clicks - will find subsequent occurrences without moving the mouse. -
- - In all these actions, the mouse motion is not done if the text - is a null string within a non-null selected string in the tag, - so that (for example) complex regular expressions may be selected - and applied repeatedly to the body by just clicking button 3 over - them.
-

Chords of mouse buttons
- Several operations are bound to multiple-button actions. After - selecting text, with button 1 still down, pressing button 2 executes - Cut and button 3 executes Paste. After clicking one button, the - other undoes the first; thus (while holding down button 1) 2 followed - by 3 is a Snarf that leaves the file undirtied; 3 - followed by 2 is a no-op. These actions also apply to text selected - by double-clicking because the double-click expansion is made - when the second click starts, not when it ends. -
- - Commands may be given extra arguments by a mouse chord with buttons - 2 and 1. While holding down button 2 on text to be executed as - a command, clicking button 1 appends the text last pointed to - by button 1 as a distinct final argument. For example, to search - for literal text one may execute Look text with - button 2 or instead point at text with button 1 in any window, - release button 1, then execute Look, clicking button 1 while 2 - is held down. -
- - When an external command (e.g. echo(1)) is executed this way, - the extra argument is passed as expected and an environment variable - $acmeaddr is created that holds, in the form interpreted by button - 3, the fully-qualified address of the extra argument.
-

Support programs
- Win creates a new acme window and runs a command (default $SHELL) - in it, turning the window into something analogous to an rio(1) - window. Executing text in a win window with button 2 is similar - to using Send. -
- - Awd loads the tag line of its window with the directory in which - it’s running, suffixed −label (default rc); it is intended to - be executed by a cd function for use in win windows. An example - definition is
- -
- - fn cd { builtin cd $1 && awd $sysname }
- -
-

Applications and guide files
- In the directory /acme live several subdirectories, each corresponding - to a program or set of related programs that employ acme’s user - interface. Each subdirectory includes source, binaries, and a - readme file for further information. It also includes a guide, - a text file holding sample commands to invoke the - programs. The idea is to find an example in the guide that best - matches the job at hand, edit it to suit, and execute it. -
- - Whenever a command is executed by acme, the default search path - includes the directory of the window containing the command and - its subdirectory $cputype. The program directories in /acme contain - appropriately labeled subdirectories of binaries, so commands - named in the guide files will be found - automatically when run. Also, acme binds the directories /acme/bin - and /acme/bin/$cputype to the end of /bin when it starts; this - is where acme-specific programs such as win and awd reside.
- -

-

FILES
- -
- - $home/acme.dump   default file for Dump and Load; also where state - is written if acme dies or is killed unexpectedly, e.g. by deleting - its window.
- /acme/*/guide     template files for applications
- /acme/*/readme    informal documentation for applications
- /acme/*/src       source for applications
- /acme/*/mips      MIPS-specific binaries for applications
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acme
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9term/win.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/awd
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acme(4)
- Rob Pike, Acme: A User Interface for Programmers.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - With the −l option or Load command, the recreation of windows - under control of external programs such as win is just to rerun - the command; information may be lost.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/acmeevent.html b/man/man1/acmeevent.html deleted file mode 100644 index 230145ce..00000000 --- a/man/man1/acmeevent.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,332 +0,0 @@ - -acmeevent(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACMEEVENT(1)ACMEEVENT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acmeevent, acme.rc – shell script support for acme clients
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9p read acme/acme/$winid/event | acmeevent -
- - . /usr/local/plan9/lib/acme.rc -
- - newwindow -
- - winread file -
- - winwrite file -
- - winctl cmd -
- - windump [ dumpdir | − ] [ dumpcmd | − ] -
- - winname name -
- - windel [ sure ] -
- - winwriteevent c1 c2 q0 q1 [ eq0 eq1 flag textlen text chordarg - chordaddr ] -
- - wineventloop
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Acmeevent and acme.rc make it easy to write simple acme(1) client - programs as shell scripts. -
- - Acme clients read the event files (see acme(4)) for the windows - they control, reacting to the events. The events are presented - in a format that is easy to read with C programs but hard to read - with shell scripts. -
- - Acmeevent reads an acme(4) event stream from standard input, printing - a shell-friendly version of the events, one per line, on standard - output. Each output line from acmeevent has the form:
- -
- - event c1 c2 q0 q1 eq0 eq1 flag textlen text chordarg chordaddr - -
- - -
- The fields are:
- c1    A character indicating the origin or cause of the action. The - possible causes are: a write to the body or tag file (E), a write - to the window’s other files (F), input via the keyboard (K), and - input via the mouse (M).
- c2    A character indicating the type of action. The possible types - are: text deleted from the body (D), text deleted from the tag - (d), text inserted in the body (I), text inserted in the tag (i), - a button 3 action in the body (L), a button 3 action in the tag - (l), a button 2 action in the body (X), and a button 2 action - in the - -
- - tag (x).
- -
- q0, q1The character addresses of the action.
- eq0, q1
- -
- - The expanded character addresses of the action. If the text indicated - by q0, q1 is a null string that has a non-null expansion, eq0, - eq1 are the addresses of the expansion. Otherwise they are the - same as q0, q1.
- -
- flag   Flag is a bitwise OR (reported decimally) of the following: - 1 if the text indicated is recognized as an acme built-in command; - 2 if the text indicated is a null string that has a non-null expansion - (see eq0, eq1 above); 8 if the command has an extra (chorded) - argument (see chordarg below). Flag remains from the - -
- - acme(4) event format. Because eq0, eq1, and chordarg are explicit - in each event (unlike in acme(4) events), flag can usually be - ignored.
- -
- textlen
- -
- - The length of the action text (or its expansion) for button 2 - and button 3 events in characters.
- -
- text   If textlen is less than 256 chracters, text is the action - text itself. Otherwise it is an empty string and must be read - from the data file.
- chordarg
- -
- - The chorded argument for an action.
- -
- chordorigin
- -
- - If the chord argument is in the body of a named window, chordorigin - specifies the full address of the argument, as in /etc/group:#123,#234. - -
- - -
- To experiment with acmeevent, create an empty window in acme (using - New),type
- -
- - 9p read acme/$winid/event | acmeevent
- -
- - -
- inside it, and execute it. Actions performed on the window will - be printed as events in the +Errors window. -
- - Acme.rc is a library of rc(1) shell functions useful for writing - acme clients. -
- - Newwindow creates a new acme window and sets $winid to the new - window’s id. The other commands all use $winid to determine which - window to operate on. -
- - Winread prints the current window’s file to standard output. It - is equivalent to cat /mnt/acme/acme/$winid/file on Plan 9. Similarly, - winwrite writes standard input to the current window’s file. Winread - and winwrite are useful mainly in building more complex functions. - -
- - Winctl writes cmd to the window’s ctl file. The most commonly-used - command is clean, which marks the window as clean. See acme(4) - for a full list of commands. -
- - Windump sets the window’s dump directory and dump command (see - acme(4)). If either argument is omitted or is −, that argument - is not set. -
- - Winname sets the name displayed in the window’s tag. -
- - Windel simulates the Del command. If the argument sure is given, - it simulates the Delete command. -
- - Winwriteevent writes an event to the window’s event file. The - event is in the format produced by acmeevent. Only the first four - arguments are necessary: the rest are ignored. Event handlers - should call winwriteevent to pass unhandled button 2 or button - 3 events back to acme for processing. -
- - Wineventloop executes the current window’s event file, as output - by acmeevent. It returns when the window has been deleted. Before - running wineventloop , clients must define a shell function named - event, which will be run for each incoming event, as rc executes - the output of acmeevent. A typical event function - need only worry about button 2 and button 3 events. Those events - not handled should be sent back to acme with winwriteevent.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Adict, a dictionary browser, is implemented using acmeevent and - acme.rc. The event handler is:
- -
- - fn event {
- -
- - switch($1$2){
- case Mx MX      # button 2 − pass back to acme
- winwriteevent $*
- case Ml ML      # button 3 − open new window on dictionary or entry
- {
- if(~ $dict NONE)
- dictwin /adict/$7/ $7
- if not
- dictwin /adict/$dict/$7 $dict $7
- } &
- }
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Note that the button 3 handler starts a subshell in which to run - dictwin. That subshell will create a new window, set its name, - possibly fill the window with a dictionary list or dictionary - entry, mark the window as clean, and run the event loop:
- -
- - fn dictwin {
- -
- - newwindow
- winname $1
- dict=$2
- if(~ $dict NONE)
- dict −d '?' >[2=1] | sed 1d | winwrite body
- if(~ $#* 3)
- dict −d $dict $3 >[2=1] | winwrite body
- winctl clean
- wineventloop
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- The script starts with an initial window:
- -
- - dictwin /adict/ NONE
- -
- - -
- Button 3 clicking on a dictionary name in the initial window will - create a new empty window for that dictionary. Typing and button - 3 clicking on a word in that window will create a new window with - the dictionary’s entry for that word. -
- - See /usr/local/plan9/bin/adict for the full implementation.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acmeevent.c
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/acme.rc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acme(1), acme(4), rc(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is more that could be done to ease the writing of complicated - clients.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ascii.html b/man/man1/ascii.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4067eece..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ascii.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,159 +0,0 @@ - -ascii(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ASCII(1)ASCII(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ascii, unicode – interpret ASCII, Unicode characters
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ascii [ −8 ] [ −oxdbn ] [ −nct ] [ text ] -
- - unicode [ −nt ] hexmin−hexmax -
- - unicode [ −t ] hex [ ... ] -
- - unicode [ −n ] characters -
- - look hex /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ascii prints the ASCII values corresponding to characters and - vice versa; under the −8 option, the ISO Latin-1 extensions (codes - 0200-0377) are included. The values are interpreted in a settable - numeric base; −o specifies octal, −d decimal, −x hexadecimal (the - default), and −bn base n. -
- - With no arguments, ascii prints a table of the character set in - the specified base. Characters of text are converted to their - ASCII values, one per line. If, however, the first text argument - is a valid number in the specified base, conversion goes the opposite - way. Control characters are printed as two- or three-character - mnemonics. Other options are:
- −n    Force numeric output.
- −c    Force character output.
- −t    Convert from numbers to running text; do not interpret control - characters or insert newlines. -
- - Unicode is similar; it converts between UTF and character values - from the Unicode Standard (see utf(7)). If given a range of hexadecimal - numbers, unicode prints a table of the specified Unicode characters - -- their values and UTF representations. Otherwise it translates - from UTF to numeric value or vice versa, depending - on the appearance of the supplied text; the −n option forces numeric - output to avoid ambiguity with numeric characters. If converting - to UTF , the characters are printed one per line unless the −t - flag is set, in which case the output is a single string containing - only the specified characters. Unlike ascii, unicode treats - no characters specially. -
- - The output of ascii and unicode may be unhelpful if the characters - printed are not available in the current font. -
- - The file /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode contains a table of characters - and descriptions, sorted in hexadecimal order, suitable for look(1) - on the lower case hex values of characters.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - ascii −d
- -
- - Print the ASCII table base 10.
- -
- unicode p
- -
- - Print the hex value of ‘p’.
- -
- unicode 2200−22f1
- -
- - Print a table of miscellaneous mathematical symbols.
- -
- look 039 /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode
- -
- - See the start of the Greek alphabet’s encoding in the Unicode - Standard.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode
- -
- - table of characters and descriptions.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ascii.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/unicode.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - look(1), tcs(1), utf(7), font(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/astro.html b/man/man1/astro.html deleted file mode 100644 index f410421c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/astro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ - -astro(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ASTRO(1)ASTRO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - astro – print astronomical information
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - astro [ −dlpsatokm ] [ −c n ] [ −C d ] [ −e obj1 obj2 ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Astro reports upcoming celestial events, by default for 24 hours - starting now. The options are:
- d     Read the starting date. A prompt gives the input format.
- l     Read the north latitude, west longitude, and elevation of the - observation point. A prompt gives the input format. If l is missing, - the initial position is read from the file /usr/local/plan9/sky/here.
- c     Report for n (default 1) successive days.
- C     Used with −c, set the interval to d days (or fractions of days).
- e     Report distance between the centers of objects, in arc seconds, - during eclipses or occultations involving obj1 and obj2.
- p     Print the positions of objects at the given time rather than - searching for interesting conjunctions. For each, the name is - followed by the right ascension (hours, minutes, seconds), declination - (degrees, minutes, seconds), azimuth (degrees), elevation (degrees), - and semidiameter (arc seconds). For the sun and - -
- - moon, the magnitude is also printed. The first line of output - presents the date and time, sidereal time, and the latitude, longitude, - and elevation.
- -
- s     Print output in English words suitable for speech synthesizers.
- a     Include a list of artificial earth satellites for interesting - events. (There are no orbital elements for the satellites, so - this option is not usable.)
- t     Read ΔT from standard input. ΔT is the difference between ephemeris - and universal time (seconds) due to the slowing of the earth’s - rotation. ΔT is normally calculated from an empirical formula. - This option is needed only for very accurate timing of occultations, - eclipses, etc.
- o     Search for stellar occultations.
- k     Print times in local time (‘kitchen clock’) as described in the - timezone environment variable.
- m     Includes a single comet in the list of objects. This is modified - (in the source) to refer to an approaching comet but in steady - state usually refers to the last interesting comet (currently - Hale-Bopp, C/1995 O1).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/sky/estartab
- -
- - ecliptic star data
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/sky/here
- -
- - default latitude (N), longitude (W), and elevation (meters)
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/astro
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - scat(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The k option reverts to GMT outside of 1970-2036.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/basename.html b/man/man1/basename.html deleted file mode 100644 index b04ce45d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/basename.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -basename(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BASENAME(1)BASENAME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - basename – strip file name affixes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - basename [ −d ] string [ suffix ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Basename deletes any prefix ending in slash (/) and the suffix, - if present in string, from string, and prints the result on the - standard output. -
- - The −d option instead prints the directory component, that is, - string up to but not including the final slash. If the string - contains no slash, a period and newline are printed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/basename.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/bc.html b/man/man1/bc.html deleted file mode 100644 index c4f7e7ba..00000000 --- a/man/man1/bc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,272 +0,0 @@ - -bc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BC(1)BC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - bc – arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - bc [ −c ] [ −l ] [ −s ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Bc is an interactive processor for a language that resembles C - but provides arithmetic on numbers of arbitrary length with up - to 100 digits right of the decimal point. It takes input from - any files given, then reads the standard input. The −l argument - stands for the name of an arbitrary precision math library. The - −s - argument suppresses the automatic display of calculation results; - all output is via the print command. -
- - The following syntax for bc programs is like that of C; L means - letter a-z, E means expression, S means statement.
- Lexical
- -
- - -
- - comments are enclosed in /* */
- newlines end statements
- -
- -
- Names
- -
- - -
- - simple variables: L
- array elements: L[E]
- The words ibase, obase, and scale
- -
- -
- Other operands
- -
- - -
- - arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and decimal point.
- (E)
- sqrt(E)
- length(E)
- number of significant decimal digits
- scale(E)
- number of digits right of decimal point
- L(E,...,E)
- function call
- -
- -
- Operators
- -
- - -
- - +    −    *    /    %    ^ (% is remainder; ^ is power)
- ++    −−
- ==    <=    >=    !=    <    >
- =    +=    −=    *=    /=    %=    ^=
- -
- -
- Statements
- -
- - -
- - E
- { S ; ... ; S }
- print E
- if ( E ) S
- while ( E ) S
- for ( E ; E ; E ) S
- null statement
- break
- quit
- "text"
- -
- -
- Function definitions
- -
- - -
- - define L ( L , ... , L ){
- auto L , ... , L
- S ; ... ; S
- return E -
- - }
- -
- -
- Functions in    −l math library
- -
- - -
- - s(x)sine
- c(x)cosine
- e(x)exponential
- l(x)log
- a(x)arctangent
- j(n, x)
- Bessel function
- -
- - -
- -
- All function arguments are passed by value. -
- - The value of an expression at the top level is printed unless - the main operator is an assignment or the −s command line argument - is given. Text in quotes, which may include newlines, is always - printed. Either semicolons or newlines may separate statements. - Assignment to scale influences the number of digits to - be retained on arithmetic operations in the manner of dc(1). Assignments - to ibase or obase set the input and output number radix respectively. - -
- - The same letter may be used as an array, a function, and a simple - variable simultaneously. All variables are global to the program. - Automatic variables are pushed down during function calls. In - a declaration of an array as a function argument or automatic - variable empty square brackets must follow the array name. -
- - Bc is actually a preprocessor for dc(1), which it invokes automatically, - unless the −c (compile only) option is present. In this case the - dc input is sent to the standard output instead.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Define a function to compute an approximate value of the exponential. - Use it to print 10 values. (The exponential function in the library - gives better answers.) -
- - scale = 20
- define e(x) {
- -
- - auto a, b, c, i, s
- a = 1
- b = 1
- s = 1
- for(i=1; 1; i++) {
- -
- - a *= x
- b *= i
- c = a/b
- if(c == 0) return s
- s += c
- -
- }
- -
- }
- for(i=1; i<=10; i++) print e(i)
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/bclib mathematical library
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/bc.y
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - dc(1), hoc(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - No &&, ||, or ! operators. -
- - A for statement must have all three Es. -
- - A quit is interpreted when read, not when executed.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/bundle.html b/man/man1/bundle.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4f052d42..00000000 --- a/man/man1/bundle.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - -bundle(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BUNDLE(1)BUNDLE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - bundle – collect files for distribution
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - bundle file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Bundle writes on its standard output a shell script for rc(1) - or a Bourne shell which, when executed, will recreate the original - files. Its main use is for distributing small numbers of text - files by mail(1). -
- - Although less refined than standard archives from 9ar (see 9c(1)) - or tar(1), a bundle file is self-documenting and complete; little - preparation is required on the receiving machine.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - bundle mkfile *.[ch] | mail kremvax!boris
- -
- - Send a makefile to Boris together with related .c and .h files. - Upon receiving the mail, Boris may save the file sans postmark, - say in gift/horse, then do
- -
- cd gift; sh horse; mk
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/bundle
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9ar (in 9c(1)), tar(1), mail(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Bundle will not create directories and is unsatisfactory for non-text - files. -
- - Beware of gift horses.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cal.html b/man/man1/cal.html deleted file mode 100644 index ec3cffc2..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cal.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ - -cal(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CAL(1)CAL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cal – print calendar
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cal [ month ] [ year ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Cal prints a calendar. Month is either a number from 1 to 12, - a lower case month name, or a lower case three-letter prefix of - a month name. Year can be between 1 and 9999. If either month - or year is omitted, the current month or year is used. If only - one argument is given, and it is a number larger than 12, a - calendar for all twelve months of the given year is produced; - otherwise a calendar for just one month is printed. The calendar - produced is that for England and her colonies. -
- - Try
- -
- - cal sep 1752
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cal.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The year is always considered to start in January even though - this is historically naive. -
- - Beware that cal 90 refers to the early Christian era, not the - 20th century.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/calendar.html b/man/man1/calendar.html deleted file mode 100644 index 48b9816b..00000000 --- a/man/man1/calendar.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ - -calendar(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CALENDAR(1)CALENDAR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - calendar – print upcoming events
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - calendar [ –y ] [ –p days ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Calendar reads the named files, default $HOME/lib/calendar, and - writes to standard output any lines containing today’s or tomorrow’s - date. Examples of recognized date formats are "4/11", "April 11", - "Apr 11", "11 April", and "11 Apr". All comparisons are case insensitive. - -
- - If the –y flag is given, an attempt is made to match on year too. - In this case, dates of the forms listed above will be accepted - if they are followed by the current year (or last two digits thereof) - or not a year — digits not followed by white space or non-digits. - -
- - If the –p flag is given, its argument is the number of days ahead - to match dates. This flag is not repeatable, and it performs no - special processing at the end of the week. -
- - On Friday and Saturday, events through Monday are printed. -
- - To have your calendar mailed to you every day, use cron(8).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/lib/calendar   personal calendar
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/calendar.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cat.html b/man/man1/cat.html deleted file mode 100644 index 36d6923e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ - -cat(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CAT(1)CAT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cat, read, nobs – catenate files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cat [ file ... ]
- read [ −m ] [ −n nline ] [ file ... ]
- nobs [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard - output. Thus
- -
- - cat file -
- - -
- prints a file and
- -
- - cat file1 file2 >file3 -
- - -
- concatenates the first two files and places the result on the - third. -
- - If no file is given, cat reads from the standard input. Output - is buffered in blocks matching the input. -
- - Read copies to standard output exactly one line from the named - file, default standard input. It is useful in interactive rc(1) - scripts. -
- - The −m flag causes it to continue reading and writing multiple - lines until end of file; −n causes it to read no more than nline - lines. -
- - Read always executes a single write for each line of input, which - can be helpful when preparing input to programs that expect line-at-a-time - data. It never reads any more data from the input than it prints - to the output. -
- - Nobs copies the named files to standard output except that it - removes all backspace characters and the characters that precede - them. It is useful to use as $PAGER with the Unix version of man(1) - when run inside a win (see acme(1)) window.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cat.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/read.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/nobs
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cp(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Read exits with status eof on end of file or, in the −n case, - if it doesn’t read nlines lines.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Beware of cat a b >a and cat a b >b, which destroy input files before - reading them.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cleanname.html b/man/man1/cleanname.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8f736fbd..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cleanname.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ - -cleanname(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CLEANNAME(1)CLEANNAME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cleanname – clean a path name
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cleanname [ −d pwd ] names ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - For each file name argument, cleanname, by lexical processing - only, prints the shortest equivalent string that names the same - (possibly hypothetical) file. It eliminates multiple and trailing - slashes, and it lexically interprets . and .. directory components - in the name. If the −d option is present, unrooted names are - prefixed with pwd/ before processing.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cleanname.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cleanname(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/clog.html b/man/man1/clog.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6c12e0be..00000000 --- a/man/man1/clog.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ - -clog(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CLOG(1)CLOG(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - auxclog – create date-stamped console log
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - auxclog console logfile
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Auxclog opens the file console and writes every line read from - it, prefixed by the ASCII time, to the file logfile.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/auxclog.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Should be named aux/clog.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cmp.html b/man/man1/cmp.html deleted file mode 100644 index cc7831a9..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cmp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ - -cmp(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CMP(1)CMP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cmp – compare two files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cmp [ −lsL ] file1 file2 [ offset1 [ offset2 ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The two files are compared. A diagnostic results if the contents - differ, otherwise there is no output. -
- - The options are:
- l     Print the byte number (decimal) and the differing bytes (hexadecimal) - for each difference.
- s     Print nothing for differing files, but set the exit status.
- L     Print the line number of the first differing byte. -
- - If offsets are given, comparison starts at the designated byte - position of the corresponding file. Offsets that begin with 0x - are hexadecimal; with 0, octal; with anything else, decimal.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cmp.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - diff(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - If a file is inaccessible or missing, the exit status is open. - If the files are the same, the exit status is empty (true). If - they are the same except that one is longer than the other, the - exit status is EOF. Otherwise cmp reports the position of the - first disagreeing byte and the exit status is differ. - -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/colors.html b/man/man1/colors.html deleted file mode 100644 index af67eec2..00000000 --- a/man/man1/colors.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ - -colors(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COLORS(1)COLORS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - colors, cmapcube – display color map
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - colors [ −r −x ] -
- - cmapcube [ −nbw ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Colors presents a grid showing the colors in the RGBV color map - (see color(7)). -
- - Clicking mouse button 1 over a color in the grid will display - the map index for that color, its red, green, and blue components, - and the 32-bit hexadecimal color value as defined in allocimage(3). - If the −x option is specified, the components will also be listed - in hexadecimal. -
- - The −r option instead shows, in the same form, a grey-scale ramp. - -
- - A menu on mouse button 3 contains a single entry, to exit the - program. -
- - Cmapcube presents the same colors but in a 3-dimensional cube. - Dragging with button 1 rotates the cube. Clicking on a color with - button 2 displays the map index for that color. Clicking button - 3 exits. -
- - The −n option disables drawing of the color squares. The −b and - −w options set the background (default grey) to black or white.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/colors.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - color(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/comm.html b/man/man1/comm.html deleted file mode 100644 index 860a0956..00000000 --- a/man/man1/comm.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -comm(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COMM(1)COMM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - comm – select or reject lines common to two sorted files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - comm [ −123 ] file1 file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Comm reads file1 and file2, which are in lexicographical order, - and produces a three column output: lines only in file1; lines - only in file2; and lines in both files. The file name − means - the standard input. -
- - Flag 1, 2, or 3 suppresses printing of the corresponding column.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - comm −12 file1 file2
- -
- - Print lines common to two sorted files.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/comm.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1), cmp(1), diff(1), uniq(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/core.html b/man/man1/core.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9c1cf3df..00000000 --- a/man/man1/core.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ - -core(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CORE(1)CORE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - core – print information about dead processes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - core [ dir | corefile ]...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Core prints information about dead processes that have been saved - as core dumps. -
- - Core reads its arguments in order. If a directory is encountered, - core reads every core file named core.* or *.core in that directory. - -
- - For each core file read, core prints the date and time the core - was generated, the command that generated it, and a short stack - trace at the time of the core dump. -
- - If no arguments are given, core searches the directory $COREDIR - for core files; if $COREDIR is not set, core searches the current - directory.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/core.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acid(1), db(1), core(5)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Core has not been written.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/crop.html b/man/man1/crop.html deleted file mode 100644 index 34a4eefb..00000000 --- a/man/man1/crop.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ - -crop(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CROP(1)CROP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - crop, iconv – frame, crop, and convert image
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - crop [ −c red green blue ] [ −i n | −x dx | −y dy | −r minx miny - maxx maxy ] [ −t tx ty ] [ −b red green blue ] [ file ] -
- - iconv [ −u ] [ −c chandesc ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Crop reads an image(7) file (default standard input), crops it, - and writes it as a compressed image(7) file to standard output. - There are two ways to specify a crop, by color value or by geometry. - They may be combined in a single run of crop, in which case the - color value crop will be done first. -
- - The −c option takes a red-green-blue triplet as described in color(3). - (For example, white is 255 255 255.) The corresponding color is - used as a value to be cut from the outer edge of the picture; - that is, the image is cropped to remove the maximal outside rectangular - strip in which every pixel has the specified color. - -
- - The −i option insets the image rectangle by a constant amount, - n, which may be negative to generate extra space around the image. - The −x and −y options are similar, but apply only to the x or - y coordinates of the image. -
- - The −r option specifies an exact rectangle. -
- - The −t option specifies that the image’s coordinate system should - be translated by tx, ty as the last step of processing. -
- - The −b option specifies a background color to be used to fill - around the image if the cropped image is larger than the original, - such as if the −i option is given a negative argument. This can - be used to draw a monochrome frame around the image. The default - color is black. -
- - Iconv changes the format of pixels in the image file (default - standard input) and writes the resulting image to standard output. - Pixels in the image are converted according to the channel descriptor - chandesc, (see image(7)). For example, to convert a 4-bit-per-pixel - grey-scale image to an 8-bit-per-pixel color-mapped - image, chandesc should be m8. If chandesc is not given, the format - is unchanged. The output image is by default compressed; the −u - option turns off the compression.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To crop white edges off the picture and add a ten-pixel pink border,
- -
- - crop −c 255 255 255 −i −10 −b 255 150 150 imagefile > cropped
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/crop.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - image(7), color(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Iconv should be able to do Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion or - dithering when converting to small image depths.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cvs.1 b/man/man1/cvs.1 index cb0cec69..bb650481 100644 --- a/man/man1/cvs.1 +++ b/man/man1/cvs.1 @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ cvs up -dP .EE .PP Compare -.IR libdraw (3) +.I libdraw against its source from January 1, 2005: .IP .EX diff --git a/man/man1/date.html b/man/man1/date.html deleted file mode 100644 index a8cbbf9a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/date.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ - -date(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DATE(1)DATE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - date – date and time
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - date [ option ] [ seconds ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Print the date, in the format -
- - -
- - Tue Aug 16 17:03:52 CDT 1977 -
- - -
- The options are
- −u    Report Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) rather than local time.
- −n    Report the date as the number of seconds since the epoch, 00:00:00 - GMT, January 1, 1970. -
- - The conversion from Greenwich Mean Time to local time depends - on the $timezone environment variable; see ctime(3). -
- - If the optional argument seconds is present, it is used as the - time to convert rather than the real time.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/date.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/db.html b/man/man1/db.html deleted file mode 100644 index eed2c3f9..00000000 --- a/man/man1/db.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,548 +0,0 @@ - -db(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DB(1)DB(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - db – debugger
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - db [ option ... ] [ textfile ] [ pid | corefile ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Db is a general purpose debugging program. It may be used to examine - files and to provide a controlled environment for the execution - of programs. -
- - A textfile is a file containing the text and initialized data - of an executable program. A pid or corefile specifies the memory - image of a process. A pid gives the id of an executing process - to be accessed via ptrace(2). A corefile specifies the name of - a core dump (see core(5) on your system of choice) containing - the - memory image of a terminated process. This manual refers to the - memory image specified by pid or corefile as a memfile. -
- - A map associated with each textfile or memfile supports accesses - to instructions and data in the file; see ‘Addresses’. -
- - An argument consisting entirely of digits is assumed to be a process - id; otherwise, it is the name of a textfile or corefile. When - a textfile is given, the textfile map is associated with it. If - only a memfile is given, the textfile map is derived from the - corresponding textfile, if it can be determined (this varies from - system to - system). When a memfile is given, the memfile map is associated - with it; otherwise the map is undefined and accesses to it are - not permitted. -
- - Commands to db are read from the standard input and responses - are to the standard output. The options are
- −w    Open textfile and memfile for writing as well as reading.
- −Ipath
- -
- - Directory in which to look for relative path names in $< and $<< - commands.
- -
- −mmachine
- -
- - Assume instructions are for the given CPU type (possible names - include 386 and powerpc; adding the suffix −co as in 386−co and - powerpc−co selects disassembly in the manufacturer’s syntax, if - available, rather than the default Plan 9 syntax). -
- - -
- Most db commands have the following form:
- -
- - [address] [, count] [command] -
- - -
- If address is present then the current position, called ‘dot’, - is set to address. Initially dot is set to 0. Most commands are - repeated count times with dot advancing between repetitions. The - default count is 1. Address and count are expressions. Multiple - commands on one line must be separated by ;. -

Expressions
- Expressions are evaluated as long ints.
- .     The value of dot.
- +     The value of dot incremented by the current increment.
- ^     The value of dot decremented by the current increment.
- "     The last address typed.
- integer
- -
- - A number, in decimal radix by default. The prefixes 0 and 0o and - 0O (zero oh) force interpretation in octal radix; the prefixes - 0t and 0T force interpretation in decimal radix; the prefixes - 0x, 0X, and # force interpretation in hexadecimal radix. Thus - 020, 0o20, 0t16, and #10 all represent sixteen. - -
- integer.fraction
- -
- - A single-precision floating point number.
- -
- 'c'   The 16-bit value of a character. \ may be used to escape a - '.
- <name
- -
- - The value of name, which is a register name. The register names - are those printed by the $r command.
- -
- symbol
- -
- - A symbol is a sequence of upper or lower case letters, underscores - or digits, not starting with a digit. \ may be used to escape - other characters. The location of the symbol is calculated from - the symbol table in textfile.
- -
- routine.name
- -
- - The address of the variable name in the specified C routine. Both - routine and name are symbols. If name is omitted the value is - the address of the most recently activated stack frame corresponding - to routine; if routine is omitted, the active procedure is assumed.
- -
- file:integer
- -
- - The address of the instruction corresponding to the source statement - at the indicated line number of the file. If the source line contains - no executable statement, the address of the instruction associated - with the nearest executable source line is returned. Files begin - at line 1. If multiple files of the same name - are loaded, an expression of this form resolves to the first file - encountered in the symbol table.
- -
- (exp)
- -
- - The value of the expression exp. -
- - -
- Monadic operators
- -
- - *exp   The contents of the location addressed by exp in memfile.
- @exp   The contents of the location addressed by exp in textfile.
- −exp   Integer negation.
- ~exp   Bitwise complement.
- %exp   When used as an address, exp is an offset into the segment - named ublock; see ‘Addresses’.
- -
- - -
- Dyadic operators are left-associative and are less binding than - monadic operators.
- -
- - e1+e2Integer addition.
- e1−e2Integer subtraction.
- e1*e2Integer multiplication.
- e1%e2Integer division.
- e1&e2Bitwise conjunction.
- e1|e2Bitwise disjunction.
- e1#e2E1 rounded up to the next multiple of e2.
- -
-

Commands
- Most commands have the following syntax:
- ?f    Locations starting at address in textfile are printed according - to the format f.
- /f    Locations starting at address in memfile are printed according - to the format f.
- =f    The value of address itself is printed according to the format - f. -
- - A format consists of one or more characters that specify a style - of printing. Each format character may be preceded by a decimal - integer that is a repeat count for the format character. If no - format is given then the last format is used. -
- - Most format letters fetch some data, print it, and advance (a - local copy of) dot by the number of bytes fetched. The total number - of bytes in a format becomes the currentincrement.
- -
- - o     Print two-byte integer in octal.
- O     Print four-byte integer in octal.
- q     Print two-byte integer in signed octal.
- Q     Print four-byte integer in signed octal.
- d     Print two-byte integer in decimal.
- D     Print four-byte integer in decimal.
- V     Print eight-byte integer in decimal.
- Z     Print eight-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
- x     Print two-byte integer in hexadecimal.
- X     Print four-byte integer in hexadecimal.
- Y     Print eight-byte integer in hexadecimal.
- u     Print two-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
- U     Print four-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
- f     Print as a single-precision floating point number.
- F     Print double-precision floating point.
- b     Print the addressed byte in hexadecimal.
- c     Print the addressed byte as an ASCII character.
- C     Print the addressed byte as a character. Printable ASCII characters - are represented normally; others are printed in the form \xnn.
- s     Print the addressed characters, as a UTF string, until a zero - byte is reached. Advance dot by the length of the string, including - the zero terminator.
- S     Print a string using the escape convention (see C above).
- r     Print as UTF the addressed two-byte integer (rune).
- R     Print as UTF the addressed two-byte integers as runes until a - zero rune is reached. Advance dot by the length of the string, - including the zero terminator.
- i     Print as machine instructions. Dot is incremented by the size - of the instruction.
- I     As i above, but print the machine instructions in an alternate - form if possible.
- M     Print the addressed machine instruction in a machine-dependent - hexadecimal form.
- a     Print the value of dot in symbolic form. Dot is unaffected.
- A     Print the value of dot in hexadecimal. Dot is unaffected.
- z     Print the function name, source file, and line number corresponding - to dot (textfile only). Dot is unaffected.
- p     Print the addressed value in symbolic form. Dot is advanced by - the size of a machine address.
- t     When preceded by an integer, tabs to the next appropriate tab - stop. For example, 8t moves to the next 8-space tab stop. Dot - is unaffected.
- n     Print a newline. Dot is unaffected.
- "..."   Print the enclosed string. Dot is unaffected.
- ^     Dot is decremented by the current increment. Nothing is printed.
- +     Dot is incremented by 1. Nothing is printed.
- −     Dot is decremented by 1. Nothing is printed.
- -
- - -
- Other commands include:
- newline
- -
- - Update dot by the current increment. Repeat the previous command - with a count of 1.
- -
- [?/]l value mask
- -
- - Words starting at dot are masked with mask and compared with value - until a match is found. If l is used, the match is for a two-byte - integer; L matches four bytes. If no match is found then dot is - unchanged; otherwise dot is set to the matched location. If mask - is omitted then ~0 is used. - -
- [?/]w value ...
- -
- - Write the two-byte value into the addressed location. If the command - is W, write four bytes.
- -
- [?/]m s b e f [?]
- -
- - New values for (b, e, f) in the segment named s are recorded. - Valid segment names are text, data, or ublock. If less than three - address expressions are given, the remaining parameters are left - unchanged. If the list is terminated by ? or / then the file (textfile - or memfile respectively) is used for subsequent - requests. For example, /m? causes / to refer to textfile.
- -
- >name
- -
- - Dot is assigned to the variable or register named.
- -
- !     The rest of the line is passed to rc(1) for execution.
- $modifier
- -
- - Miscellaneous commands. The available modifiers are:
- <f    Read commands from the file f. If this command is executed in - a file, further commands in the file are not seen. If f is omitted, - the current input stream is terminated. If a count is given, and - is zero, the command is ignored.
- <<f   Similar to < except it can be used in a file of commands without - causing the file to be closed. There is a (small) limit to the - number of << files that can be open at once.
- >f    Append output to the file f, which is created if it does not - exist. If f is omitted, output is returned to the terminal.
- ?     Print process id, the condition which caused stopping or termination, - the registers and the instruction addressed by pc. This is the - default if modifier is omitted.
- r     Print the general registers and the instruction addressed by - pc. Dot is set to pc.
- R     Like $r, but include miscellaneous processor control registers - and floating point registers.
- f     Print floating-point register values as single-precision floating - point numbers.
- F     Print floating-point register values as double-precision floating - point numbers.
- b     Print all breakpoints and their associated counts and commands. - ‘B’ produces the same results.
- c     Stack backtrace. If address is given, it specifies the address - of a pair of 32-bit values containing the sp and pc of an active - process. This allows selecting among various contexts of a multi-threaded - process. If C is used, the names and (long) values of all parameters, - automatic and static variables are - -
- - printed for each active function. If count is given, only the - first count frames are printed.
- -
- a     Attach to the running process whose pid is contained in address.
- e     The names and values of all external variables are printed.
- w     Set the page width for output to address (default 80).
- q     Exit from db.
- m     Print the address maps.
- k     Simulate kernel memory management.
- Mmachine
- -
- - Set the machine type used for disassembling instructions.
- -
- -
- :modifier
- -
- - Manage a subprocess. Available modifiers are:
- h     Halt an asynchronously running process to allow breakpointing. - Unnecessary for processes created under db, e.g. by :r.
- bc    Set breakpoint at address. The breakpoint is executed count–1 - times before causing a stop. Also, if a command c is given it - is executed at each breakpoint and if it sets dot to zero the - breakpoint causes a stop.
- d     Delete breakpoint at address.
- r     Run textfile as a subprocess. If address is given the program - is entered at that point; otherwise the standard entry point is - used. Count specifies how many breakpoints are to be ignored before - stopping. Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the same - line as the command. An argument - -
- - starting with < or > causes the standard input or output to be established - for the command.
- -
- cs    The subprocess is continued. If s is omitted or nonzero, the - subprocess is sent the note that caused it to stop. If 0 is specified, - no note is sent. (If the stop was due to a breakpoint or single-step, - the corresponding note is elided before continuing.) Breakpoint - skipping is the same as for r. - ss    As for c except that the subprocess is single stepped for count - machine instructions. If a note is pending, it is received before - the first instruction is executed. If there is no current subprocess - then textfile is run as a subprocess as for r. In this case no - note can be sent; the remainder of the line is - -
- - treated as arguments to the subprocess.
- -
- Ss    Identical to s except the subprocess is single stepped for count - lines of C source. In optimized code, the correspondence between - C source and the machine instructions is approximate at best.
- x     The current subprocess, if any, is released by db and allowed - to continue executing normally.
- k     The current subprocess, if any, is terminated.
- nc    Display the pending notes for the process. If c is specified, - first delete c’th pending note.
- -
-

Addresses
- The location in a file or memory image associated with an address - is calculated from a map associated with the file. Each map contains - one or more quadruples (t, f, b, e, o), defining a segment named - t (usually, text, data, or core) in file f mapping addresses in - the range b through e to the part of the file beginning at - offset o. If segments overlap, later segments obscure earlier - ones. An address a is translated to a file address by finding - the last segment in the list for which b≤a<e; the location in the - file is then address+f–b. -
- - Usually, the text and initialized data of a program are mapped - by segments called text, data, and bss. Since a program file does - not contain stack data, this data is not mapped. The text segment - is mapped similarly in a normal (i.e., non-kernel) memfile. However, - one or more segments called data provide access to - process memory. This region contains the program’s static data, - the bss, the heap and the stack. -
- - Sometimes it is useful to define a map with a single segment mapping - the region from 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF; a map of this type allows an - entire file to be examined without address translation. -
- - The $m command dumps the currently active maps. The ?m and /m - commands modify the segment parameters in the textfile and memfile - maps, respectively.
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - To set a breakpoint at the beginning of write() in extant process - 27:
- -
- - % db 27
- :h
- write:b
- :c
- -
- - -
- To set a breakpoint at the entry of function parse when the local - variable argc in main is equal to 1:
- -
- - parse:b *main.argc−1=X
- -
- - -
- This prints the value of argc−1 which as a side effect sets dot; - when argc is one the breakpoint will fire. Beware that local variables - may be stored in registers; see the BUGS section.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acid(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/db
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Exit status is 0, unless the last command failed or returned non-zero - status.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Examining a local variable with routine.name returns the contents - of the memory allocated for the variable, but with optimization, - variables often reside in registers. Also, on some architectures, - the first argument is always passed in a register. -
- - Variables and parameters that have been optimized away do not - appear in the symbol table, returning the error bad local variable - when accessed by db. -
- - Breakpoints should not be set on instructions scheduled in delay - slots. When a program stops on such a breakpoint, it is usually - impossible to continue its execution.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/dc.html b/man/man1/dc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 95b7fd24..00000000 --- a/man/man1/dc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ - -dc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DC(1)DC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dc – desk calculator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - dc [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Dc is an arbitrary precision desk calculator. Ordinarily it operates - on decimal integers, but one may specify an input base, output - base, and a number of fractional digits to be maintained. The - overall structure of dc is a stacking (reverse Polish) calculator. - If an argument is given, input is taken from that file until its - end, then from the standard input. The following constructions - are recognized:
- number
- -
- - The value of the number is pushed on the stack. A number is an - unbroken string of the digits 0−9A−F or 0−9a−f. A hexadecimal - number beginning with a lower case letter must be preceded by - a zero to distinguish it from the command associated with the - letter. It may be preceded by an underscore _ to - input a negative number. Numbers may contain decimal points.
- -
- +    − /    *    %    ^
- -
- - Add +, subtract −, multiply *, divide /, remainder %, or exponentiate - ^ the top two values on the stack. The two entries are popped - off the stack; the result is pushed on the stack in their place. - Any fractional part of an exponent is ignored.
- -
- sx
- Sx    Pop the top of the stack and store into a register named x, - where x may be any character. Under operation S register x is - treated as a stack and the value is pushed on it.
- lx
- Lx    Push the value in register x onto the stack. The register x - is not altered. All registers start with zero value. Under operation - L register x is treated as a stack and its top value is popped - onto the main stack.
- d     Duplicate the top value on the stack.
- p     Print the top value on the stack. The top value remains unchanged. - P interprets the top of the stack as an text string, removes it, - and prints it.
- f     Print the values on the stack.
- q
- Q     Exit the program. If executing a string, the recursion level - is popped by two. Under operation Q the top value on the stack - is popped and the string execution level is popped by that value.
- x     Treat the top element of the stack as a character string and - execute it as a string of dc commands.
- X     Replace the number on the top of the stack with its scale factor.
- [ ... ]
- -
- - Put the bracketed text string on the top of the stack.
- -
- <x
- >x
- =x    Pop and compare the top two elements of the stack. Register - x is executed if they obey the stated relation.
- v     Replace the top element on the stack by its square root. Any - existing fractional part of the argument is taken into account, - but otherwise the scale factor is ignored.
- !     Interpret the rest of the line as a shell command.
- c     Clear the stack.
- i     The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number base - for further input.
- I     Push the input base on the top of the stack.
- o     The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number base - for further output. In bases larger than 10, each ‘digit’ prints - as a group of decimal digits.
- O     Push the output base on the top of the stack.
- k     Pop the top of the stack, and use that value as a non-negative - scale factor: the appropriate number of places are printed on - output, and maintained during multiplication, division, and exponentiation. - The interaction of scale factor, input base, and output base will - be reasonable if all are changed together. - z     Push the stack level onto the stack.
- Z     Replace the number on the top of the stack with its length.
- ?     A line of input is taken from the input source (usually the terminal) - and executed.
- ; :   Used by bc for array operations. -
- - The scale factor set by k determines how many digits are kept - to the right of the decimal point. If s is the current scale factor, - sa is the scale of the first operand, sb is the scale of the second, - and b is the (integer) second operand, results are truncated to - the following scales.
- -
- - +,−     max(sa,sb)
- *      min(sa+sb , max(s,sa,sb))
- /      s
- %      so that dividend = divisor*quotient + remainder; remainder has - sign of dividend
- ^      min(sa×|b|, max(s,sa))
- v      max(s,sa)
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - -
- - Print the first ten values of n!
- -
- - [la1+dsa*pla10>y]sy
- 0sa1
- lyx
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/dc.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - bc(1), hoc(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - x is unimplemented, where x is an octal number: an internal error.
- ‘Out of headers’ for too many numbers being kept around.
- ‘Nesting depth’ for too many levels of nested execution.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - When the input base exceeds 16, there is no notation for digits - greater than F. -
- - Past its time.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/deroff.html b/man/man1/deroff.html deleted file mode 100644 index cb0c5aff..00000000 --- a/man/man1/deroff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ - -deroff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DEROFF(1)DEROFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - deroff, delatex – remove formatting requests
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - deroff [ option ... ] file ... -
- - delatex file
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Deroff reads each file in sequence and removes all nroff and troff(1) - requests and non-text arguments, backslash constructions, and - constructs of preprocessors such as eqn(1), pic(1), and tbl(1). - Remaining text is written on the standard output. Deroff follows - files included by .so and .nx commands; if a file has - already been included, a .so for that file is ignored and a .nx - terminates execution. If no input file is given, deroff reads - from standard input. -
- - The options are
- −w    Output a word list, one ‘word’ (string of letters, digits, and - properly embedded ampersands and apostrophes, beginning with a - letter) per line. Other characters are skipped. Otherwise, the - output follows the original, with the deletions mentioned above.
- −_    Like −w, but consider underscores to be alphanumeric rather - than punctuation.
- −i    Ignore .so and .nx requests.
- −ms
- −mm   Remove titles, attachments, etc., as well as ordinary troff - constructs, from ms(7) or mm documents.
- −ml   Same as −mm, but remove lists as well. -
- - Delatex does for tex and latex (see tex(1)) files what deroff - −wi does for troff files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/deroff.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/delatex.lx
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), tex(1), spell(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - These filters are not complete interpreters of troff or tex. For - example, macro definitions containing \$ cause chaos in deroff - when the popular $$ delimiters for eqn are in effect. -
- - Text inside macros is emitted at place of definition, not place - of call.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/dial.html b/man/man1/dial.html deleted file mode 100644 index 70456274..00000000 --- a/man/man1/dial.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ - -dial(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DIAL(1)DIAL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dial – connect to a remote service
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - dial [ −e ] addr
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Dial connects to the network address addr (see dial(3)) and then - copies data from the connection to standard output, and from standard - input to the connection. -
- - By default, dial exits when end of file is reached on standard - input or on the network connection. The −e flag causes dial to - exit only in response to end of file on the network connection.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/dial.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - dial(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/dict.html b/man/man1/dict.html deleted file mode 100644 index 48d086ba..00000000 --- a/man/man1/dict.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,168 +0,0 @@ - -dict(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DICT(1)DICT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dict, adict – dictionary browser
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - dict [ −k ] [ −d dictname ] [ −c command ] [ pattern ] adict [ - −d dictname ] [ pattern ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Dict is a dictionary browser. If a pattern is given on the command - line, dict prints all matching entries; otherwise it repeatedly - accepts and executes commands. The options are
- −d dictname   Use the given dictionary. A list of available dictionaries - is printed by option −d?. The default is the first dictionary - on the list that is installed on the system.
- −c command   Execute one command and quit. The command syntax is - described below.
- −k          Print a pronunciation key. -
- - Patterns are regular expressions (see regexp(7)), with an implicit - leading ^ and trailing $. Patterns are matched against an index - of headwords and variants, to form a ‘match set’. By default, - both patterns and the index are folded: upper case characters - are mapped into their lower case equivalents, and Latin accented - characters are mapped into their non-accented equivalents. In - interactive mode, there is always a ‘current match set’ and a - ‘current entry’ within the match set. Commands can change either - or both, as well as print the entries or information about them. - -
- - Commands have an address followed by a command letter. Addresses - have the form:
- /re/     Set the match set to all entries matching the regular expression - re, sorted in dictionary order. Set the current entry to the first - of the match set.
- !re!     Like /re/ but use exact matching, i.e., without case and accent - folding.
- n       An integer n means change the current entry to the nth of the - current match set.
- #n      The integer n is an absolute byte offset into the raw dictionary. - (See the A command, below.)
- addr+    After setting the match set and current entry according to - addr, change the match set and current entry to be the next entry - in the dictionary (not necessarily in the match set) after the - current entry.
- addr−    Like addr+ but go to previous dictionary entry. -
- - The command letters come in pairs: a lower case and the corresponding - upper case letter. The lower case version prints something about - the current entry only, and advances the current entry to the - next in the match set (wrapping around to the beginning after - the last). The upper case version prints something about - all of the match set and resets the current entry to the beginning - of the set.
- p,P    Print the whole entry.
- h,H    Print only the headword(s) of the entry.
- a,A    Print the dictionary byte offset of the entry.
- r,R    Print the whole entry in raw format (without translating special - characters, etc.). -
- - If no command letter is given for the first command, H is assumed. - After an H, the default command is p. Otherwise, the default command - is the previous command. -
- - Adict is a dictionary browser for acme(1). When run with no arguments, - it creates a new acme window named /adict/ listing the installed - dictionaries. Clicking with button 3 on a dictionary name will - create a new empty window named /adict/dict/. Typing and then - clicking on a pattern in this window will create - a new lookup window named /adict/dict/pattern containing the dictionary’s - definition of pattern. Clicking with button 3 on any word in this - new window will create new lookup windows. -
- - If adict is run with a pattern , it starts with the /adict/dict/pattern - window. -
- - If adict is run with no pattern but with a −d option, it starts - with the /adict/dict/ window.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/dict
- -
- - dictionaries
- -
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - regexp(7)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/dict
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/adict
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - A font with wide coverage of the Unicode Standard should be used - for best results. (Try /usr/local/plan9/font/pelm/unicode.9.font.) - -
- - If the pattern doesn’t begin with a few literal characters, matching - takes a long time. -
- - The dictionaries are not distributed outside Bell Labs, though - see /usr/local/plan9/dict/README for information on using free - dictionaries prepared by Project Gutenberg.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/diff.html b/man/man1/diff.html deleted file mode 100644 index c5e824be..00000000 --- a/man/man1/diff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ - -diff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DIFF(1)DIFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - diff – differential file comparator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - diff [ −efmnbwr ] file1 ... file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Diff tells what lines must be changed in two files to bring them - into agreement. If one file is a directory, then a file in that - directory with basename the same as that of the other file is - used. If both files are directories, similarly named files in - the two directories are compared by the method of diff for text - files and - cmp(1) otherwise. If more than two file names are given, then - each argument is compared to the last argument as above. The −r - option causes diff to process similarly named subdirectories recursively. - When processing more than one file, diff prefixes file differences - with a single line listing the two differing files, in - the form of a diff command line. The −m flag causes this behavior - even when processing single files. -
- - The normal output contains lines of these forms:
- -
- - n1 a n3,n4
- n1,n2 d n3
- n1,n2 c n3,n4 -
- - -
- These lines resemble ed commands to convert file1 into file2. - The numbers after the letters pertain to file2. In fact, by exchanging - ‘a’ for ‘d’ and reading backward one may ascertain equally how - to convert file2 into file1. As in ed, identical pairs where n1 - = n2 or n3 = n4 are abbreviated as a single number. -
- - Following each of these lines come all the lines that are affected - in the first file flagged by ‘<’, then all the lines that are affected - in the second file flagged by ‘>’. -
- - The −b option causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be ignored - and other strings of blanks to compare equal. The −w option causes - all white-space to be removed from input lines before applying - the difference algorithm. -
- - The −n option prefixes each range with file: and inserts a space - around the a, c, and d verbs. The −e option produces a script - of a, c and d commands for the editor ed, which will recreate - file2 from file1. The −f option produces a similar script, not - useful with ed, in the opposite order. It may, however, be useful - as - input to a stream-oriented post-processor. -
- - Except in rare circumstances, diff finds a smallest sufficient - set of file differences.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/diff[12]
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/diff
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cmp(1), comm(1), ed(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Exit status is the empty string for no differences, some for some, - and error for trouble.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Editing scripts produced under the −e or −f option are naive about - creating lines consisting of a single ‘.’. -
- - When running diff on directories, the notion of what is a text - file is open to debate.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/doctype.html b/man/man1/doctype.html deleted file mode 100644 index f837d915..00000000 --- a/man/man1/doctype.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ - -doctype(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DOCTYPE(1)DOCTYPE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - doctype – intuit command line for formatting a document
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - doctype [ −n ] [ −T dev ] [ file ] ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Doctype examines a troff(1) input file to deduce the appropriate - text formatting command and prints it on standard output. Doctype - recognizes input for troff(1), related preprocessors like eqn(1), - and the ms(7) and mm macro packages. -
- - Option −n invokes nroff instead of troff. The −T option is passed - to troff.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - eval `{doctype chapter.?} | lp
- -
- - Typeset files named chapter.0, chapter.1, ...
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/doctype
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), eqn(1), tbl(1), pic(1), grap(1), ms(7), man(7)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - In true A.I. style, its best guesses are inspired rather than - accurate.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/echo.html b/man/man1/echo.html deleted file mode 100644 index a4f6e359..00000000 --- a/man/man1/echo.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ - -echo(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ECHO(1)ECHO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - echo – print arguments
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - echo [ −n ] [ arg ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by - a newline on the standard output. Option −n suppresses the newline.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/echo.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - If echo draws an error while writing to standard output, the exit - status is write error. Otherwise the exit status is empty.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ed.html b/man/man1/ed.html deleted file mode 100644 index a259b9bc..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ed.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,439 +0,0 @@ - -ed(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ED(1)ED(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ed – text editor
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ed [ − ] [ −o ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ed is a venerable text editor. -
- - If a file argument is given, ed simulates an e command (see below) - on that file: it is read into ed’s buffer so that it can be edited. - The options are
- −     Suppress the printing of character counts by e, r, and w commands - and of the confirming ! by ! commands.
- −o    (for output piping) Write all output to the standard error file - except writing by w commands. If no file is given, make /dev/stdout - the remembered file; see the e command below. -
- - Ed operates on a ‘buffer’, a copy of the file it is editing; changes - made in the buffer have no effect on the file until a w (write) - command is given. The copy of the text being edited resides in - a temporary file called the buffer. -
- - Commands to ed have a simple and regular structure: zero, one, - or two addresses followed by a single character command, possibly - followed by parameters to the command. These addresses specify - one or more lines in the buffer. Missing addresses are supplied - by default. -
- - In general, only one command may appear on a line. Certain commands - allow the addition of text to the buffer. While ed is accepting - text, it is said to be in input mode. In this mode, no commands - are recognized; all input is merely collected. Input mode is left - by typing a period . alone at the beginning of a line. -
- - Ed supports the regular expression notation described in regexp(7). - Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify lines and - in one command (see s below) to specify a portion of a line which - is to be replaced. If it is desired to use one of the regular - expression metacharacters as an ordinary character, that - character may be preceded by ‘\’. This also applies to the character - bounding the regular expression (often /) and to \ itself. -
- - To understand addressing in ed it is necessary to know that at - any time there is a current line. Generally, the current line - is the last line affected by a command; however, the exact effect - on the current line is discussed under the description of each - command. Addresses are constructed as follows. - 1.    The character ., customarily called ‘dot’, addresses the current - line.
- 2.    The character $ addresses the last line of the buffer.
- 3.    A decimal number n addresses the n-th line of the buffer.
- 4.    'x addresses the line marked with the name x, which must be - a lower-case letter. Lines are marked with the k command.
- 5.    A regular expression enclosed in slashes ( /) addresses the - line found by searching forward from the current line and stopping - at the first line containing a string that matches the regular - expression. If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning - of the buffer.
- 6.    A regular expression enclosed in queries ? addresses the line - found by searching backward from the current line and stopping - at the first line containing a string that matches the regular - expression. If necessary the search wraps around to the end of - the buffer.
- 7.    An address followed by a plus sign + or a minus sign − followed - by a decimal number specifies that address plus (resp. minus) - the indicated number of lines. The plus sign may be omitted.
- 8.    An address followed by + (or −) followed by a regular expression - enclosed in slashes specifies the first matching line following - (or preceding) that address. The search wraps around if necessary. - The + may be omitted, so 0/x/ addresses the first line in the - buffer with an x. Enclosing the regular expression in - -
- - ? reverses the search direction.
- -
- 9.    If an address begins with + or − the addition or subtraction - is taken with respect to the current line; e.g. −5 is understood - to mean .−5.
- 10.   If an address ends with + or −, then 1 is added (resp. subtracted). - As a consequence of this rule and rule 9, the address − refers - to the line before the current line. Moreover, trailing + and - − characters have cumulative effect, so −− refers to the current - line less 2.
- 11.   To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor, - the character ^ in addresses is equivalent to −. -
- - Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. Commands which - require no addresses regard the presence of an address as an error. - Commands which accept one or two addresses assume default addresses - when insufficient are given. If more addresses are given than - a command requires, the last one or two - (depending on what is accepted) are used. -
- - Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma ,. - They may also be separated by a semicolon ;. In this case the - current line is set to the previous address before the next address - is interpreted. If no address precedes a comma or semicolon, line - 1 is assumed; if no address follows, the last line of the - buffer is assumed. The second address of any two-address sequence - must correspond to a line following the line corresponding to - the first address. -
- - In the following list of ed commands, the default addresses are - shown in parentheses. The parentheses are not part of the address, - but are used to show that the given addresses are the default. - ‘Dot’ means the current line.
- (.)a
- <text>
- .     Read the given text and append it after the addressed line. Dot - is left on the last line input, if there were any, otherwise at - the addressed line. Address 0 is legal for this command; text - is placed at the beginning of the buffer.
- (.,.)b[+−][pagesize][pln]
- -
- - Browse. Print a ‘page’, normally 20 lines. The optional + (default) - or − specifies whether the next or previous page is to be printed. - The optional pagesize is the number of lines in a page. The optional - p, n, or l causes printing in the specified format, initially - p. Pagesize and format are remembered between b - commands. Dot is left at the last line displayed.
- -
- (.,.)c
- <text>
- .     Change. Delete the addressed lines, then accept input text to - replace these lines. Dot is left at the last line input; if there - were none, it is left at the line preceding the deleted lines.
- (.,.)d
- -
- - Delete the addressed lines from the buffer. Dot is set to the - line following the last line deleted, or to the last line of the - buffer if the deleted lines had no successor.
- -
- e filename
- -
- - Edit. Delete the entire contents of the buffer; then read the - named file into the buffer. Dot is set to the last line of the - buffer. The number of characters read is typed. The file name - is remembered for possible use in later e, r, or w commands. If - filename is missing, the remembered name is used. - -
- E filename
- -
- - Unconditional e; see ‘q’ below.
- -
- f filename
- -
- - Print the currently remembered file name. If filename is given, - the currently remembered file name is first changed to filename.
- -
- (1,$)g/regular expression/command list
- (1,$)g/regular expression/
- (1,$)g/regular expression
- -
- - Global. First mark every line which matches the given regularexpression. - Then for every such line, execute the command list with dot initially - set to that line. A single command or the first of multiple commands - appears on the same line with the global command. All lines of - a multi-line list except the last line - must end with \. The ‘.’ terminating input mode for an a, i, c - command may be omitted if it would be on the last line of the - command list. The commands g and v are not permitted in the command - list. Any character other than space or newline may be used instead - of / to delimit the regular expression. - The second and third forms mean g/regular expression/p.
- -
- (.)i
- <text>
- .     Insert the given text before the addressed line. Dot is left - at the last line input, or, if there were none, at the line before - the addressed line. This command differs from the a command only - in the placement of the text.
- (.,.+1)j
- -
- - Join the addressed lines into a single line; intermediate newlines - are deleted. Dot is left at the resulting line.
- -
- (.)kxMark the addressed line with name x, which must be a lower-case - letter. The address form 'x then addresses this line.
- (.,.)l
- -
- - List. Print the addressed lines in an unambiguous way: a tab is - printed as \t, a backspace as \b, backslashes as \\, and non-printing - characters as a backslash, an x, and four hexadecimal digits. - Long lines are folded, with the second and subsequent sub-lines - indented one tab stop. If the last character in - the line is a blank, it is followed by \n. An l may be appended, - like p, to any non-I/O command.
- -
- (.,.)ma
- -
- - Move. Reposition the addressed lines after the line addressed - by a. Dot is left at the last moved line.
- -
- (.,.)n
- -
- - Number. Perform p, prefixing each line with its line number and - a tab. An n may be appended, like p, to any non-I/O command.
- -
- (.,.)p
- -
- - Print the addressed lines. Dot is left at the last line printed. - A p appended to any non-I/O command causes the then current line - to be printed after the command is executed.
- -
- (.,.)P
- -
- - This command is a synonym for p.
- -
- q     Quit the editor. No automatic write of a file is done. A q or - e command is considered to be in error if the buffer has been - modified since the last w, q, or e command.
- Q     Quit unconditionally.
- ($)r filename
- -
- - Read in the given file after the addressed line. If no filename - is given, the remembered file name is used. The file name is remembered - if there were no remembered file name already. If the read is - successful, the number of characters read is printed. Dot is left - at the last line read from the file. - -
- (.,.)sn/regular expression/replacement/
- (.,.)sn/regular expression/replacement/g
- (.,.)sn/regular expression/replacement
- -
- - Substitute. Search each addressed line for an occurrence of the - specified regular expression. On each line in which n matches - are found (n defaults to 1 if missing), the nth matched string - is replaced by the replacement specified. If the global replacement - indicator g appears after the command, all subsequent - matches on the line are also replaced. It is an error for the - substitution to fail on all addressed lines. Any character other - than space or newline may be used instead of / to delimit the - regular expression and the replacement. Dot is left at the last - line substituted. The third form means - sn/regular expression/replacement/p. The second / may be omitted - if the replacement is empty.
- An ampersand & appearing in the replacement is replaced by the - string matching the regular expression. The characters \n, where - n is a digit, are replaced by the text matched by the n-th regular - subexpression enclosed between ( and ). When nested parenthesized - subexpressions are present, n is - determined by counting occurrences of ( starting from the left.
- A literal &, /, \ or newline may be included in a replacement by - prefixing it with \.
- -
- (.,.)ta
- -
- - Transfer. Copy the addressed lines after the line addressed by - a. Dot is left at the last line of the copy.
- -
- (.,.)u
- -
- - Undo. Restore the preceding contents of the first addressed line - (sic), which must be the last line in which a substitution was - made (double sic).
- -
- (1,$)v/regular expression/command list
- -
- - This command is the same as the global command g except that the - command list is executed with dot initially set to every line - except those matching the regular expression.
- -
- (1,$)w filename
- -
- - Write the addressed lines to the given file. If the file does - not exist, it is created with mode 666 (readable and writable - by everyone). If no filename is given, the remembered file name, - if any, is used. The file name is remembered if there were no - remembered file name already. Dot is unchanged. If the write is - successful, the number of characters written is printed.
- -
- (1,$)W filename
- -
- - Perform w, but append to, instead of overwriting, any existing - file contents.
- -
- ($)=   Print the line number of the addressed line. Dot is unchanged.
- !shell command
- -
- - Send the remainder of the line after the ! to rc(1) to be interpreted - as a command. Dot is unchanged.
- -
- (.+1)<newline>
- -
- - An address without a command is taken as a p command. A terminal - / may be omitted from the address. A blank line alone is equivalent - to .+1p; it is useful for stepping through text. -
- - -
- If an interrupt signal (DEL) is sent, ed prints a ? and returns - to its command level. -
- - When reading a file, ed discards NUL characters and all characters - after the last newline.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/e*
- ed.hup work is saved here if terminal hangs up
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ed.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sam(1), sed(1), regexp(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - ?name for inaccessible file; ?TMP for temporary file overflow; - ? for errors in commands or other overflows.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/eqn.html b/man/man1/eqn.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3d819235..00000000 --- a/man/man1/eqn.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ - -eqn(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
EQN(1)EQN(1) -
- -
- - -
- - delim $$
- -
- -
-

NAME
- -
- - eqn – typeset mathematics
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - eqn [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Eqn is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics on - a typesetter. Usage is almost always
- -
- - eqn file ... | troff -
- - -
- If no files are specified, eqn reads from the standard input. - Eqn prepares output for the typesetter named in the −Tdest option - (default −Tutf; see troff(1)). When run with other preprocessor - filters, eqn usually comes last. -
- - A line beginning with .EQ marks the start of an equation; the - end of an equation is marked by a line beginning with .EN. Neither - of these lines is altered, so they may be defined in macro packages - to get centering, numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two - characters as ‘delimiters’; text between delimiters is also - eqn input. Delimiters may be set to characters x and y with the - option −dxy or (more commonly) with delim xy between .EQ and .EN. - Left and right delimiters may be identical. (They are customarily - taken to be $font L "$$" )$. Delimiters are turned off by delim - off. All text that is neither between delimiters - nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched. -
- - Tokens within eqn are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines, braces, - double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {} are used for - grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single character like - x could appear, a complicated construction enclosed in braces - may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents a full space in the - output, circumflex ^ half as much. -
- - Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords sub - and sup. Thus x sub i makes $x sub i$, a sub i sup 2 produces - $a sub i sup 2$, and e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2} gives $e sup {x - sup 2 + y sup 2}$. -
- - Over makes fractions: a over b yields $a over b$. -
- - Sqrt produces square roots: 1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c} results - in $1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}$ . -
- - The keywords from and to introduce lower and upper limits on arbitrary - things: $lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i$ is made with - lim from {n −> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i. -
- - Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height are - made with left and right: left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha - right ] ~=~1 produces $left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right - ] ~=~1$. The right clause is optional. Legal characters after - left and right are braces, brackets, - bars, c and f for ceiling and floor, and "" for nothing at all (useful - for a right-side-only bracket). -
- - Vertical piles of things are made with pile, lpile, cpile, and - rpile: pile {a above b above c} produces $pile {a above b above - c}$. There can be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. lpile - left-justifies, pile and cpile center, with different vertical - spacing, and rpile right justifies. -
- - Matrices are made with matrix: matrix { lcol { x sub i above y - sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } } produces $matrix { lcol { x sub i - above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }$. In addition, there is rcol - for a right-justified column. -
- - Diacritical marks are made with prime, dot, dotdot, hat, tilde, - bar, under, vec, dyad, and under: x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar - + g(t) under is $x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under$, and - x vec = y dyad is $x vec = y dyad$. -
- - Sizes and fonts can be changed with prefix operators size n, size - ±n, fat, roman, italic, bold, or font n. Size and fonts can be - changed globally in a document by gsize n and gfont n, or by the - command-line arguments −sn and −fn. -
- - Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point sizes - from the previous size; this may be changed by the command-line - argument −pn. -
- - Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place mark before - the desired lineup point in the first equation; place lineup at - the place that is to line up vertically in subsequent equations. - -
- - Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined with - define: define thing % replacement % defines a new token called - thing which will be replaced by replacement whenever it appears - thereafter. The % may be any character that does not occur in - replacement. -
- - Keywords like sum ( sum ), int ( int ), inf ( inf ), and shorthands - like >= (>=), −> (->), and != ( != ) are recognized. Greek letters - are spelled out in the desired case, as in alpha or GAMMA. Mathematical - words like sin, cos, log are made Roman automatically. Troff(1) - four-character escapes like \(lh (<=) can - be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes " " are passed - through untouched; this permits keywords to be entered as text, - and can be used to communicate with troff when all else fails.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /sys/lib/troff/font/devutf   font descriptions for PostScript
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/eqn
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), tbl(1)
- J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, “Troff User’s Manual”.
- B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, “Typesetting Mathematics--User’s - Guide”, Unix Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, - Volume 2.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote them, - as in bold "12.3". delim off
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/factor.html b/man/man1/factor.html deleted file mode 100644 index 893f2ad9..00000000 --- a/man/man1/factor.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ - -factor(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FACTOR(1)FACTOR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - factor, primes – factor a number, generate large primes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - factor [ number ] -
- - primes [ start [ finish ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Factor prints number and its prime factors, each repeated the - proper number of times. The number must be positive and less than - 254 (about 1.8×1016). -
- - If no number is given, factor reads a stream of numbers from the - standard input and factors them. It exits on any input not a positive - integer. Maximum running time is proportional to -/n . -
- - -
- - Primes prints the prime numbers ranging from start to finish, - where start and finish are positive numbers less than 256. If - finish is missing, primes prints without end; if start is missing, - it reads the starting number from the standard input.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/factor.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/primes.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/fmt.html b/man/man1/fmt.html deleted file mode 100644 index 28d339a4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/fmt.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ - -fmt(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FMT(1)FMT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fmt, htmlfmt – simple text formatters
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - fmt [ option ... ] [ file ... ] -
- - htmlfmt [ −a ] [ −c charset ] [ −u url ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fmt copies the given files (standard input by default) to its - standard output, filling and indenting lines. The options are
- −l n   Output line length is n, including indent (default 70).
- −w n   A synonym for −l.
- −i n   Indent n spaces (default 0).
- −j    Do not join short lines: only fold long lines. -
- - Empty lines and initial white space in input lines are preserved. - Empty lines are inserted between input files. -
- - Fmt is idempotent: it leaves already formatted text unchanged. - -
- - Htmlfmt performs a similar service, but accepts as input text - formatted with HTML tags. It accepts fmt’s −l and −w flags and - also:
- −a    Normally htmlfmt suppresses the contents of form fields and - anchors (URLs and image files); this flag causes it to print them, - in square brackets.
- −c charset
- -
- - change the default character set from iso-8859-1 to charset. This - is the character set assumed if there isn’t one specified by the - html itself in a <meta> directive.
- -
- −u urlUse url as the base URL for the document when displaying - anchors; sets −a.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/fmt.c -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/htmlfmt
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Htmlfmt makes no attempt to render the two-dimensional geometry - of tables; it just treats the table entries as plain, to-be-formatted - text.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/fortune.html b/man/man1/fortune.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2793ee92..00000000 --- a/man/man1/fortune.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ - -fortune(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FORTUNE(1)FORTUNE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fortune – sample lines from a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - fortune [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fortune prints a one-line aphorism chosen at random. If a file - is specified, the saying is taken from that file; otherwise it - is selected from /usr/local/plan9/lib/fortunes.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/fortunes
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/fortunes.index fast lookup table, maintained - automatically
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/fortune.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/freq.html b/man/man1/freq.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6a4b82d0..00000000 --- a/man/man1/freq.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - -freq(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FREQ(1)FREQ(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - freq – print histogram of character frequencies
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - freq [ −dxocr ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Freq reads the given files (default standard input) and prints - histograms of the character frequencies. By default, freq counts - each byte as a character; under the −r option it instead counts - UTF sequences, that is, runes. -
- - Each non-zero entry of the table is printed preceded by the byte - value, in decimal, octal, hex, and Unicode character (if printable). - If any options are given, the −d, −x, −o, −c flags specify a subset - of value formats: decimal, hex, octal, and character, respectively.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/freq.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - utf(7), wc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/fsize.html b/man/man1/fsize.html deleted file mode 100644 index 871ef383..00000000 --- a/man/man1/fsize.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ - -fsize(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FSIZE(1)FSIZE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fsize, mtime – print file information
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - fsize file ... -
- - mtime file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fsize prints the name and size of each of the files. -
- - Mtime prints the name and modification time (in seconds since - the epoch) of each of the files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/fsize.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mtime.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The output formats of the two programs are different.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/grap.html b/man/man1/grap.html deleted file mode 100644 index e4e9c3c4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/grap.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ - -grap(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GRAP(1)GRAP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - grap – pic preprocessor for drawing graphs
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - grap [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Grap is a pic(1) preprocessor for drawing graphs on a typesetter. - Graphs are surrounded by the troff ‘commands’ .G1 and .G2. Data - are scaled and plotted, with tick marks supplied automatically. - Commands exist to modify the frame, add labels, override the default - ticks, change the plotting style, define coordinate - ranges and transformations, and include data from files. In addition, - grap provides the same loops, conditionals, and macro processing - that pic does. -
- - frame ht e wid e top dotted ...: Set the frame around the graph - to specified ht and wid; default is 2 by 3 (inches). The line - styles (dotted, dashed, invis, solid (default)) of the sides (top, - bot, left, right) of the frame can be set independently. -
- - label side "a label" "as a set of strings" adjust: Place label on - specified side; default side is bottom. adjust is up (or down - left right) expr to shift default position; width expr sets the - width explicitly. -
- - ticks side in at optname expr, expr, ...: Put ticks on side at - expr, ..., and label with "expr". If any expr is followed by "...", - label tick with "...", and turn off all automatic labels. If "..." - contains %f’s, they will be interpreted as printf formatting instructions - for the tick value. Ticks point in or out (default out). Tick - iterator: instead of at ..., use from expr to expr by op expr - where op is optionally +−*/ for additive or multiplicative steps. - by can be omitted, to give steps of size 1. If no ticks are requested, - they are supplied automatically; suppress this with ticks off. - Automatic ticks normally leave a margin of 7% on each - side; set this to anything by margin = expr. -
- - grid side linedesc at optname expr, expr, ...: Draw grids perpendicular - to side in style linedesc at expr, .... Iterators and labels work - as with ticks. -
- - coord optname x min, max y min, max log x    log y: Set range of - coords and optional log scaling on either or both. This overrides - computation of data range. Default value of optname is current - coordinate system (each coord defines a new coordinate system). - -
- - plot "str" at point; "str" at point: Put str at point. Text position - can be qualified with rjust, ljust, above, below after "...". -
- - line from point to point linedesc: Draw line from here to there. - arrow works in place of line. -
- - next optname at point linedesc: Continue plot of data in optname - to point; default is current. -
- - draw optname linedesc ...: Set mode for next: use this style from - now on, and plot "..." at each point (if given). -
- - new optname linedesc ...: Set mode for next, but disconnect from - previous. -
- - A list of numbers x y1 y2 y3 ... is treated as plot bullet at - x,y1; plot bullet at x,y2; etc., or as next at x,y1 etc., if draw - is specified. Abscissae of 1,2,3,... are provided if there is - only one input number per line. -
- - A point optname expr, expr maps the point to the named coordinate - system. A linedesc is one of dot dash invis solid optionally followed - by an expression. -
- - define name {whatever}: Define a macro. There are macros already - defined for standard plotting symbols like bullet, circle, star, - plus, etc., in /usr/local/plan9/lib/grap.defines, which is included - if it exists. -
- - var = expr: Evaluate an expression. Operators are + − * and /. - Functions are log and exp (both base 10), sin, cos, sqrt; rand - returns random number on [0,1); max(e,e), min(e,e), int(e). -
- - print expr; print "...": As a debugging aid, print expr or string - on the standard error. -
- - copy "file name": Include this file right here. -
- - copy thru macro: Pass rest of input (until .G2) through macro, - treating each field (non-blank, or "...") as an argument. macro - can be the name of a macro previously defined, or the body of - one in place, like /plot $1 at $2,$3/. -
- - copy thru macro until "string": Stop copy when input is string (left-justified). - -
- - pic remainder of line: Copy to output with leading blanks removed. - -
- - graph Name pic-position: Start a new frame, place it at specified - position, e.g., graph Thing2 with .sw at Thing1.se + (0.1,0). - Name must be capitalized to keep pic happy. -
- - .anything at beginning of line: Copied verbatim. -
- - sh %anything %: Pass everything between the %’s to the shell; - as with macros, % may be any character and anything may include - newlines. -
- - # anything: A comment, which is discarded. -
- - Order is mostly irrelevant; no category is mandatory. Any arguments - on the .G1 line are placed on the generated .PS line for pic.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - .G1
- frame ht 1 top invis right invis
- coord x 0, 10 y 1, 3 log y
- ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3 "top tick"
- ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2
- label bot "silly graph"
- label left "left side label" "here"
- grid left dashed at 2.5
- copy thru / circle at $1,$2 /
- 1 1
- 2 1.5
- 3 2
- 4 1.5
- 10 3
- .G2
- frame ht 1 top invis right invis
- coord x 0, 10 y 1, 3 log y
- ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3 "top tick"
- ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2
- label bot "silly graph"
- label left "left side label" "here"
- grid left dashed at 2.5
- copy thru / circle at $1,$2 /
- 1 1
- 2 1.5
- 3 2
- 4 1.5
- 10 3
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/grap.defines   definitions of standard plotting - characters, e.g., bullet
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/grap
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - pic(1), troff(1)
- J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan, “GRAP--A Language for Typesetting - Graphs”, Unix Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, - Volume 2.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/graph.html b/man/man1/graph.html deleted file mode 100644 index af80b3d4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/graph.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ - -graph(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GRAPH(1)GRAPH(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - graph – draw a graph
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - graph [ option ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Graph with no options takes pairs of numbers from the standard - input as abscissas (x-values) and ordinates (y-values) of a graph. - Successive points are connected by straight lines. The graph is - encoded on the standard output for display by plot(1) filters. - -
- - If an ordinate is followed by a nonnumeric string, that string - is printed as a label beginning on the point. Labels may be surrounded - with quotes " " in which case they may be empty or contain blanks - and numbers; labels never contain newlines. -
- - The following options are recognized, each as a separate argument.
- −a    Supply abscissas automatically; no x-values appear in the input. - Spacing is given by the next argument (default 1). A second optional - argument is the starting point for automatic abscissas (default - 0, or 1 with a log scale in x, or the lower limit given by −x).
- −b    Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the input.
- −c    Character string given by next argument is default label for - each point.
- −g    Next argument is grid style, 0 no grid, 1 frame with ticks, - 2 full grid (default).
- −l    Next argument is a legend to title the graph. Grid ranges are - automatically printed as part of the title unless a −s option - is present.
- −m    Next argument is mode (style) of connecting lines: 0 disconnected, - 1 connected. Some devices give distinguishable line styles for - other small integers. Mode –1 (default) begins with style 1 and - rotates styles for successive curves under option −o.
- −o    (Overlay.) The ordinates for n superposed curves appear in the - input with each abscissa value. The next argument is n.
- −s    Save screen; no new page for this graph.
- −x lIf l is present, x-axis is logarithmic. Next 1 (or 2) arguments - are lower (and upper) x limits. Third argument, if present, is - grid spacing on x axis. Normally these quantities are determined - automatically.
- −y lSimilarly for y.
- −e    Make automatically determined x and y scales equal.
- −h    Next argument is fraction of space for height.
- −w    Similarly for width.
- −r    Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting.
- −u    Similarly to move up before plotting.
- −t    Transpose horizontal and vertical axes. (Option −a now applies - to the vertical axis.) -
- - If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, the axis is - reversed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/graph
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plot(1), grap(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed. Logarithmic - axes may not be reversed. Option −e actually makes automatic limits, - rather than automatic scaling, equal.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/grep.html b/man/man1/grep.html deleted file mode 100644 index e9682561..00000000 --- a/man/man1/grep.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ - -grep(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GREP(1)GREP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - grep, g – search a file for a pattern
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - grep [ option ... ] pattern [ file ... ] -
- - g [ option ... ] pattern [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Grep searches the input files (standard input default) for lines - that match the pattern, a regular expression as defined in regexp(7) - with the addition of a newline character as an alternative (substitute - for |) with lowest precedence. Normally, each line matching the - pattern is ‘selected’, and each selected line is copied to - the standard output. The options are
- −c    Print only a count of matching lines.
- −h    Do not print file name tags (headers) with output lines.
- −e    The following argument is taken as a pattern. This option makes - it easy to specify patterns that might confuse argument parsing, - such as −n.
- −i    Ignore alphabetic case distinctions. The implementation folds - into lower case all letters in the pattern and input before interpretation. - Matched lines are printed in their original form.
- −l    (ell) Print the names of files with selected lines; don’t print - the lines.
- −L    Print the names of files with no selected lines; the converse - of −l.
- −n    Mark each printed line with its line number counted in its file.
- −s    Produce no output, but return status.
- −v    Reverse: print lines that do not match the pattern.
- −f    The pattern argument is the name of a file containing regular - expressions one per line.
- −b    Don’t buffer the output: write each output line as soon as it - is discovered. -
- - Output lines are tagged by file name when there is more than one - input file. (To force this tagging, include /dev/null as a file - name argument.) -
- - Care should be taken when using the shell metacharacters $*[^|()=\ - and newline in pattern; it is safest to enclose the entire expression - in single quotes '...'. An expression starting with ’*’ will treat - the rest of the expression as literal characters. -
- - G invokes grep with −n and forces tagging of output lines by file - name. If no files are listed, it searches all files matching
- -
- - *.C *.b *.c *.h *.m *.cc *.java *.py *.tex *.ms
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/grep
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/g
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ed(1), awk(1), sed(1), sam(1), regexp(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Exit status is null if any lines are selected, or non-null when - no lines are selected or an error occurs.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/gview.html b/man/man1/gview.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6abdc7da..00000000 --- a/man/man1/gview.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ - -gview(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GVIEW(1)GVIEW(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - gview – interactive graph viewer
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - gview [ −l logfile ] [ −m ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Gview reads polygonal lines or a polygonal line drawing from an - ASCII input file (which defaults to standard input), and views - it interactively, with commands to zoom in and out, perform simple - editing operations, and display information about points and polylines. - The editing commands can change the color and - thickness of the polylines, delete (or undelete) some of them, - and optionally rotate and move them. It is also possible to generate - an output file that reflects these changes and is in the same - format as the input. -
- - Since the move and rotate commands are undesirable when just viewing - a graph, they are only enabled if gview is invoked with the −m - option. -
- - Clicking on a polyline with button 1 displays the coordinates - and a t value that tells how far along the polyline. (t=0 at the - first vertex, t=1 at the first vertex, t=1.5 halfway between the - second and third vertices, etc.) The −l option generates a log - file that lists all points selected in this manner. -
- - The most important interactive operations are to zoom in by sweeping - out a rectangle, or to zoom out so that everything currently being - displayed shrinks to fit in the swept-out rectangle. Other options - on the button 3 menu are unzoom which restores the coordinate - system to the default state where everything fits on - the screen, recenter which takes a point and makes it the center - of the window, and square up which makes the horizontal and vertical - scale factors equal. -
- - To take a graph of a function where some part is almost linear - and see how it deviates from a straight line, select two points - on this part of the graph (i.e., select one with button 1 and - then select the other) and then use the slant command on the button - 3 menu. This slants the coordinate system so that the line - between the two selected points appears horizontal (but vertical - still means positive y). Then the zoom in command can be used - to accentuate deviations from horizontal. There is also an unslant - command that undoes all of this and goes back to an unslanted - coordinate system. -
- - There is a recolor command on button 3 that lets you select a - color and change everything to have that color, and a similar - command on button 2 that only affects the selected polyline. The - thick or thin command on button 2 changes the thickness of the - selected polyline and there is also an undo command for such - edits. -
- - Finally, button 3 had commands to read a new input file and display - it on top of everything else, restack the drawing order (in case - lines of different color are drawn on top of each other), write - everything into an output file, or exit the program. -
- - Each polyline in an input or output file is a space-delimited - x y coordinate pair on a line by itself, and the polyline is a - sequence of such vertices followed by a label. The label could - be just a blank line or it could be a string in double quotes, - or virtually any text that does not contain spaces and is on a - line by itself. The - label at the end of the last polyline is optional. It is not legal - to have two consecutive labels, since that would denote a zero-vertex - polyline and each polyline must have at least one vertex. (One-vertex - polylines are useful for scatter plots.)
- If the label after a polyline can contains the word Thick or a - color name (Red, Pink, Dkred, Orange, Yellow, Dkyellow, Green, - Dkgreen, Cyan, Blue, Ltblue, Magenta, Violet, Gray, Black, White), - whichever color name comes first will be used to color the polyline. - -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To see a graph of the function y=sin(x)/x generate input with - an awk script and pipe it into gview:
- -
- - awk 'BEGIN{for(x=.1;x<500;x+=.1)print x,sin(x)/x}' | gview
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/gview.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - awk(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The user interface for the slant command is counter-intuitive. - Perhaps it would be better to have a scheme for sweeping out a - parallelogram.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/gzip.html b/man/man1/gzip.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3f476f15..00000000 --- a/man/man1/gzip.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,135 +0,0 @@ - -gzip(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GZIP(1)GZIP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - gzip, gunzip, bzip2, bunzip2, zip, unzip, – compress and expand - data
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - gzip [−cvD[1−9]] [file ...] -
- - gunzip [−ctTvD] [file ...] -
- - bzip2 [−cvD[1−9]] [file ...] -
- - bunzip2 [−cvD] [file ...] -
- - zip [−vD[1−9]] [−f zipfile] file [...] -
- - unzip [−cistTvD] [−f zipfile] [file ...]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Gzip encodes files with a hybrid Lempel-Ziv 1977 and Huffman compression - algorithm known as deflate. Most of the time, the resulting file - is smaller, and will never be much bigger. Output files are named - by taking the last path element of each file argument and appending - .gz; if the resulting name ends with - .tar.gz, it is converted to .tgz instead. Gunzip reverses the - process. Its output files are named by taking the last path element - of each file argument, converting .tgz to .tar.gz, and stripping - any .gz; the resulting name must be different from the original - name. -
- - Bzip2 and bunzip2 are similar in interface to gzip and gunzip, - but use a modified Burrows-Wheeler block sorting compression algorithm. - The default suffix for output files is .bz2, with .tar.bz2 becoming - .tbz. Bunzip2 recognizes the extension .tbz2 as a synonym for - .tbz. -
- - Zip encodes the named files and places the results into the archive - zipfile, or the standard output if no file is given. Unzip extracts - files from an archive created by zip. If no files are named as - arguments, all of files in the archive are extracted. A directory’s - name implies all recursively contained files and subdirectories. - -
- - None of these programs removes the original files. If the process - fails, the faulty output files are removed. -
- - The options are:
- −c          Write to standard output rather than creating an output file.
- −i          Convert all archive file names to lower case.
- −s          Streaming mode. Looks at the file data adjacent to each compressed - file rather than seeking in the central file directory. This is - the mode used by unzip if no zipfile is specified. If −s is given, - −T is ignored.
- −t          List matching files in the archive rather than extracting them.
- −T          Set the output time to that specified in the archive.
- −1 .. −9      Sets the compression level. −1 is tuned for speed, −9 - for minimal output size. The best compromise is −6, the default.
- −v          Produce more descriptive output. With −t, adds the uncompressed - size in bytes and the modification time to the output. Without - −t, prints the names of files on standard error as they are compressed - or decompressed.
- −D          Produce debugging output.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/gzip
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/bzip2
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - tar(1), compress(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Unzip can only extract files which are uncompressed or compressed - with the deflate compression scheme. Recent zip files fall into - this category.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/hoc.html b/man/man1/hoc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 21107e8e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/hoc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ - -hoc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
HOC(1)HOC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - hoc – interactive floating point language
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - hoc [ file ... ] [ −e expression ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Hoc interprets a simple language for floating point arithmetic, - at about the level of BASIC, with C-like syntax and functions. - -
- - The named files are read and interpreted in order. If no file - is given or if file is − hoc interprets the standard input. The - −e option allows input to hoc to be specified on the command line, - to be treated as if it appeared in a file. -
- - Hoc input consists of expressions and statements. Expressions - are evaluated and their results printed. Statements, typically - assignments and function or procedure definitions, produce no - output unless they explicitly call print. -
- - Variable names have the usual syntax, including _; the name _ - by itself contains the value of the last expression evaluated. - The variables E, PI, PHI, GAMMA and DEG are predefined; the last - is 59.25..., degrees per radian. -
- - Expressions are formed with these C-like operators, listed by - decreasing precedence.
- ^     exponentiation
- ! − ++ −−
- * / %
- + −
- > >= < <= == !=
- &&
- ||
- = += −= *= /= %=
- -
- - Built in functions are abs, acos, asin, atan (one argument), cos, - cosh, exp, int, log, log10, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, and tanh. The - function read(x) reads a value into the variable x and returns - 0 at EOF; the statement print prints a list of expressions that - may include string constants such as - "hello\n". -
- - Control flow statements are if-else, while, and for, with braces - for grouping. Newline ends a statement. Backslash-newline is equivalent - to a space. -
- - Functions and procedures are introduced by the words func and - proc; return is used to return with a value from a function.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - func gcd(a, b) {
- -
- - temp = abs(a) % abs(b)
- if(temp == 0) return abs(b)
- return gcd(b, temp)
- -
- }
- for(i=1; i<12; i++) print gcd(i,12)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/hoc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - bc(1), dc(1)
- B. W. Kernighan and R. Pike, The Unix Programming Environment, - Prentice-Hall, 1984
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Error recovery is imperfect within function and procedure definitions.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/idiff.html b/man/man1/idiff.html deleted file mode 100644 index 15296a37..00000000 --- a/man/man1/idiff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ - -idiff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
IDIFF(1)IDIFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - idiff – interactive diff
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - idiff [ −bw ] file1 file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Idiff interactively merges file1 and file2 onto standard output. - Wherever file1 and file2 differ, idiff displays the differences - in the style of “diff −n” on standard error and prompts the user - to select a chunk. Valid responses are:
- <     Use the chunk from file1.
- >     Use the chunk from file2.
- =     Use the diff output itself.
- q<, q>, q=
- -
- - Use the given response for all future questions.
- -
- !cmdExecute cmd and prompt again. -
- - Idiff invokes diff(1) to compare the files. The −b and −w flags, - if passed, are passed to diff.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/idiff.*
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/idiff.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - diff(1)
- Kernighan and Pike, The Unix Programming Environment, Prentice-Hall, - 1984.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/index.html b/man/man1/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index c35ab541..00000000 --- a/man/man1/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,449 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 1 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 1 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
intro(1)intro – introduction to Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
-
9(1)9 – run Plan 9 commands -
-
-
-
9c(1)9c, 9a, 9l, 9ar – C compiler, assembler, linker, archiver -
-
-
-
9p(1)9p – read and write files on a 9P server -
-
-
-
9term(1)9term – terminal windows -
-
-
-
acid(1)acid, acidtypes – debugger -
-
-
-
acme(1)acme, win, awd – interactive text windows -
-
-
-
acmeevent(1)acmeevent, acme.rc – shell script support for acme clients -
-
-
-
ascii(1)ascii, unicode – interpret ASCII, Unicode characters -
-
-
-
astro(1)astro – print astronomical information -
-
-
-
basename(1)basename – strip file name affixes -
-
-
-
bc(1)bc – arbitrary-precision arithmetic language -
-
-
-
bundle(1)bundle – collect files for distribution -
-
-
-
cal(1)cal – print calendar -
-
-
-
calendar(1)calendar – print upcoming events -
-
-
-
cat(1)cat, read, nobs – catenate files -
-
-
-
cleanname(1)cleanname – clean a path name -
-
-
-
clog(1)auxclog – create date-stamped console log -
-
-
-
cmp(1)cmp – compare two files -
-
-
-
colors(1)colors, cmapcube – display color map -
-
-
-
comm(1)comm – select or reject lines common to two sorted files -
-
-
-
core(1)core – print information about dead processes -
-
-
-
crop(1)crop, iconv – frame, crop, and convert image -
-
-
-
date(1)date – date and time -
-
-
-
db(1)db – debugger -
-
-
-
dc(1)dc – desk calculator -
-
-
-
deroff(1)deroff, delatex – remove formatting requests -
-
-
-
dial(1)dial – connect to a remote service -
-
-
-
dict(1)dict, adict – dictionary browser -
-
-
-
diff(1)diff – differential file comparator -
-
-
-
doctype(1)doctype – intuit command line for formatting a document -
-
-
-
echo(1)echo – print arguments -
-
-
-
ed(1)ed – text editor -
-
-
-
eqn(1)eqn – typeset mathematics -
-
-
-
factor(1)factor, primes – factor a number, generate large primes -
-
-
-
fmt(1)fmt, htmlfmt – simple text formatters -
-
-
-
fortune(1)fortune – sample lines from a file -
-
-
-
freq(1)freq – print histogram of character frequencies -
-
-
-
fsize(1)fsize, mtime – print file information -
-
-
-
grap(1)grap – pic preprocessor for drawing graphs -
-
-
-
graph(1)graph – draw a graph -
-
-
-
grep(1)grep, g – search a file for a pattern -
-
-
-
gview(1)gview – interactive graph viewer -
-
-
-
gzip(1)gzip, gunzip, bzip2, bunzip2, zip, unzip, – compress and expand data -
-
-
-
hoc(1)hoc – interactive floating point language -
-
-
-
idiff(1)idiff – interactive diff -
-
-
-
join(1)join – relational database operator -
-
-
-
jpg(1)jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, yuv, ico, togif, toppm, topng, toico – view and convert pictures -
-
-
-
kill(1)kill, slay, start, stop – print commands to manipulate processes -
-
-
-
label(1)label, awd – set window label -
-
-
-
lex(1)lex – generator of lexical analysis programs -
-
-
-
look(1)look – find lines in a sorted list -
-
-
-
ls(1)ls, lc – list contents of directory -
-
-
-
man(1)man, lookman, sig – print or find pages of this manual -
-
-
-
map(1)map, mapdemo, mapd – draw maps on various projections -
-
-
-
mc(1)mc – multicolumn print -
-
-
-
mk(1)mk – maintain (make) related files -
-
-
-
mkdir(1)mkdir – make a directory -
-
-
-
namespace(1)namespace – print name space directory -
-
-
-
news(1)news – print news items -
-
-
-
p(1)p – paginate -
-
-
-
page(1)img, psv – view -
-
-
-
pic(1)pic, tpic – troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures -
-
-
-
plot(1)plot – graphics filter -
-
-
-
plumb(1)plumb – send message to plumber -
-
-
-
pr(1)pr – print file -
-
-
-
proof(1)proof – troff output interpreter -
-
-
-
ps(1)ps, psu – process status -
-
-
-
psfonts(1)psfonts, psdownload – add necessary fonts to PostScript document for printing -
-
-
-
pwd(1)pwd, pbd – working directory -
-
-
-
rc(1)rc, cd, eval, exec, exit, flag, rfork, shift, wait, whatis, ., ~ – command language -
-
-
-
rio(1)rio – rio-like Window Manager for X -
-
-
-
rm(1)rm – remove files -
-
-
-
sam(1)sam, B, E, sam.save, samterm, samsave – screen editor with structural regular expressions -
-
-
-
scat(1)scat – sky catalogue and Digitized Sky Survey -
-
-
-
secstore(1)aescbc, secstore, ipso – secstore commands -
-
-
-
sed(1)sed – stream editor -
-
-
-
seq(1)seq – print sequences of numbers -
-
-
-
sleep(1)sleep – suspend execution for an interval -
-
-
-
sort(1)sort – sort and/or merge files -
-
-
-
spell(1)spell, sprog – find spelling errors -
-
-
-
split(1)split – split a file into pieces -
-
-
-
src(1)src – find source code for executable -
-
-
-
stats(1)stats, auxstats – display graphs of system activity -
-
-
-
strings(1)strings – extract printable strings -
-
-
-
sum(1)sum, md5sum, sha1sum – sum and count blocks in a file -
-
-
-
tail(1)tail – deliver the last part of a file -
-
-
-
tbl(1)tbl – format tables for nroff or troff -
-
-
-
tcs(1)tcs – translate character sets -
-
-
-
tee(1)tee – pipe fitting -
-
-
-
test(1)test – set status according to condition -
-
-
-
time(1)time – time a command -
-
-
-
touch(1)touch – set modification date of a file -
-
-
-
tr(1)tr – translate characters -
-
-
-
tr2post(1)tr2post – convert troff intermediate to PostScript -
-
-
-
troff(1)troff, nroff – text formatting and typesetting -
-
-
-
troff2html(1)troff2html – convert troff output into HTML -
-
-
-
tweak(1)tweak – edit image files, subfont files, face files, etc. -
-
-
-
uniq(1)uniq – report repeated lines in a file -
-
-
-
units(1)units – conversion program -
-
-
-
vac(1)vac – create a vac archive on Venti -
-
-
-
wc(1)wc – word count -
-
-
-
web(1)web, wmail – handle web page, mail message for plumber -
-
-
-
wintext(1)wintext, ", "" – access text in current window -
-
-
-
xd(1)xd – hex, octal, decimal, or ASCII dump -
-
-
-
yacc(1)yacc – yet another compiler-compiler -
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man1/intro.html b/man/man1/intro.html deleted file mode 100644 index fc628e5a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/intro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,221 +0,0 @@ - -intro(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
INTRO(1)INTRO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - intro – introduction to Plan 9 from User Space
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plan 9 is a distributed computing environment built at Bell Labs - starting in the late 1980s. The system can be obtained from Bell - Labs at http://plan9.bell−labs.com/plan9 and runs on PCs and a - variety of other platforms. Plan 9 became a convenient platform - for experimenting with new ideas, - applications, and services. -
- - Plan 9 from User Space provides many of the ideas, applications, - and services from Plan 9 on Unix-like systems. It runs on FreeBSD - (x86), Linux (x86 and PowerPC), Mac OS X (PowerPC), OpenBSD (x86), - and SunOS (Sparc).
-

Commands
- Plan 9 from User Space expects its own directory tree, conventionally - /usr/local/plan9. When programs need to access files in the tree, - they expect the $PLAN9 environment variable to contain the name - of the root of the tree. See install(1) for details about installation. - -
- - Many of the familiar Unix commands, for example cat(1), ls(1), - and wc(1), are present, but in their Plan 9 forms: cat takes no - arguments, ls does not columnate its output when printing to a - terminal, and wc counts UTF characters. In some cases, the differences - are quite noticeable: grep(1) and sed(1) expect Plan 9 - regular expressions (see regexp(7)), which are closest to what - Unix calls extended regular expressions. Because of these differences, - it is not recommended to put $PLAN9/bin before the usual system - bin directories in your search path. Instead, put it at the end - of your path and use the 9(1) script when you want to - invoke the Plan 9 version of a traditional Unix command. -
- - Occasionally the Plan 9 programs have been changed to adapt to - Unix. Mk(1) now allows mkfiles to choose their own shell, and - rc(1) has a ulimit builtin and manages $PATH. -
- - Many of the graphical programs from Plan 9 are present, including - sam(1) and acme(1). An X11 window manager rio(1) mimics Plan 9’s - window system, with command windows implemented by the external - program 9term(1). Following the style of X Windows, these programs - run in new windows rather than the one in - which they are invoked. They all take a −W option to specify the - size and placement of the new window. The argument is one of widthxheight, - widthxheight@xmin,xmax, or xmin,ymin,xmax,ymax. -
- - The plumber(4) helps to connect the various Plan 9 programs together, - and fittings like web(1) connect it to external programs such - as web browsers; one can click on a URL in acme and see the page - load in Firefox.
-

User-level file servers
- In Plan 9, user-level file servers present file trees via the - Plan 9 file protocol, 9P. Processes can mount arbitrary file servers - and customize their own name spaces. These facilities are used - to connect programs. Clients interact with file servers by reading - and writing files. -
- - This cannot be done directly on Unix. Instead the servers listen - for 9P connections on Unix domain sockets; clients connect to - these sockets and speak 9P directly using the 9pclient(3) library. - Intro(4) tells more of the story. The effect is not as clean as - on Plan 9, but it gets the job done and still provides a uniform - and - easy-to-understand mechanism. The 9p(1) client can be used in - shell scripts or by hand to carry out simple interactions with - servers.
-

External databases
- Some programs rely on large databases that would be cumbersome - to include in every release. Scripts are provided that download - these databases separately. These databases can be downloaded - separately. See $PLAN9/dict/README and $PLAN9/sky/README.
-

Programming
- The shell scripts 9c and 9l (see 9c(1)) provide a simple interface - to the underlying system compiler and linker, similar to the 2c - and 2l families on Plan 9. 9c compiles source files, and 9l links - object files into executables. When using Plan 9 libraries, 9l - infers the correct set of libraries from the object files, so - that no −l - options are needed. -
- - The only way to write multithreaded programs is to use the thread(3) - library. Rfork(3) exists but is not as capable as on Plan 9. There - are many unfortunate by necessary preprocessor diversions to make - Plan 9 and Unix libraries coexist. See intro(3) for details. -
- - The debuggers acid(1) and db(1) and the debugging library mach(3) - are works in progress. They are platform-independent, so that - x86 Linux core dumps can be inspected on PowerPC Mac OS X machines, - but they are also fairly incomplete. The x86 target is the most - mature; initial PowerPC support exists; and other - targets are unimplemented. The debuggers can only inspect, not - manipulate, target processes. Support for operating system threads - and for 64-bit architectures needs to be rethought. On x86 Linux - systems, acid and db can be relied upon to produce reasonable - stack traces (often in cases when GNU gdb cannot) and - dump data structures, but that it is the extent to which they - have been developed and exercised.
-

Porting programs
- The vast majority of the familiar Plan 9 programs have been ported, - including the Unicode-aware troff(1). -
- - Of the more recent additions to Plan 9, the secstore(1) client - has been ported, though secstored has not. Vac(1) has been ported, - though vacfs has not. Factotum and venti are in progress. -
- - A backup system providing a dump file system built atop Venti - is also in progress.
-

Porting to new systems
- Porting the tree to new operating systems or architectures should - be straightforward, as system-specific code has been kept to a - minimum. The largest pieces of system-specific code are <u.h>, which - must include the right system files and set up the right integer - type definitions, and libthread, which must implement - spin locks, operating system thread creation, and context switching - routines. Portable implementations of these using <pthread.h> and - <ucontext.h> already exist. If your system supports them, you may - not need to write any system specific code at all. -
- - There are other smaller system dependencies, such as the terminal - handling code in 9term(1) and the implementation of getcallerpc(3), - but these are usually simple and are not on the critical path - for getting the system up and running.
- -

-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - The rest of this manual describes Plan 9 from User Space. Many - of the man pages have been brought from Plan 9, but they have - been updated, and others have been written from scratch. -
- - The manual pages are in a Unix style tree, with names like $PLAN9/man/man1/cat.1 - instead of Plan 9’s simpler $PLAN9/man/1/cat, so that the Unix - man(1) utility can handle it. Some systems, for example Debian - Linux, deduce the man page locations from the search path, so - that adding $PLAN9/bin to - your path is sufficient to cause $PLAN9/man to be consulted for - manual pages using the system man. On other systems, or to look - at manual pages with the same name as a system page, invoke the - Plan 9 man directly, as in 9 man cat. -
- - The manual sections follow the Unix numbering conventions, not - the Plan 9 ones. -
- - Section (1) describes general publicly accessible commands. -
- - Section (3) describes C library functions. -
- - Section (4) describes user-level file servers. -
- - Section (7) describes file formats and protocols. (On Unix, section - (5) is technically for file formats but seems now to be used for - describing specific files.) -
- - Section (9p) describes the Plan 9 file protocol 9P.
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - In Plan 9, a program’s exit status is an arbitrary text string, - while on Unix it is an integer. Section (1) of this manual describes - commands as though they exit with string statuses. In fact, exiting - with an empty status corresponds to exiting with status 0, and - exiting with any non-empty string corresponds to exiting with - status 1. See exits(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/join.html b/man/man1/join.html deleted file mode 100644 index 704837e4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/join.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ - -join(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
JOIN(1)JOIN(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - join – relational database operator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - join [ options ] file1 file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Join forms, on the standard output, a join of the two relations - specified by the lines of file1 and file2. If one of the file - names is −, the standard input is used. -
- - File1 and file2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating sequence - on the fields on which they are to be joined, normally the first - in each line. -
- - There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in file1 - and file2 that have identical join fields. The output line normally - consists of the common field, then the rest of the line from file1, - then the rest of the line from file2. -
- - Input fields are normally separated spaces or tabs; output fields - by space. In this case, multiple separators count as one, and - leading separators are discarded. -
- - The following options are recognized, with POSIX syntax.
- −a n   In addition to the normal output, produce a line for each - unpairable line in file n, where n is 1 or 2.
- −v n   Like −a, omitting output for paired lines.
- −e s   Replace empty output fields by string s.
- −1 m
- −2 m   Join on the mth field of file1 or file2.
- −jn m
- -
- - Archaic equivalent for −n m.
- -
- −ofields
- -
- - Each output line comprises the designated fields. The comma-separated - field designators are either 0, meaning the join field, or have - the form n.m, where n is a file number and m is a field number. - Archaic usage allows separate arguments for field designators. - -
- - -
- −tc   Use character c as the only separator (tab character) on input - and output. Every appearance of c in a line is significant.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - sort /etc/passwd | join −t: −1 1 −a 1 −e "" − bdays
- -
- - Add birthdays to the /etc/passwd file, leaving unknown birthdays - empty. The layout of /adm/users is given in passwd(5); bdays contains - sorted lines like ken:Feb 4, 1953.
- -
- tr : ' ' </etc/passwd | sort −k 3 3 >temp
- join −1 3 −2 3 −o 1.1,2.1 temp temp | awk '$1 < $2'
- -
- - Print all pairs of users with identical userids.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/join.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1), comm(1), awk(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - With default field separation, the collating sequence is that - of sort −b −ky,y; with −t, the sequence is that of sort −tx −ky,y. - -
- - One of the files must be randomly accessible.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/jpg.html b/man/man1/jpg.html deleted file mode 100644 index 30629c7c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/jpg.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ - -jpg(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
JPG(1)JPG(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, yuv, ico, togif, toppm, topng, toico - – view and convert pictures
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - jpg [ −39cdefFkJrtv ] [ file ... ]
- gif [ −39cdektv ] [ file ... ]
- png [ −39cdektv ] [ file ... ]
- ppm [ −39cdektv ] [ file ... ]
- bmp [ file ]
- yuv [ file ] -
- - togif [ −c comment ] [ −l loopcount ] [ −d msec ] [ −t transindex - ] [ file ... [ −d msec ] file ... ]
- toppm [ −c comment ] [ file ]
- topng [ −c comment ] [ [ −g gamma ] [ file ] -
- - ico [ file ]
- toico [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These programs read, display, and write image files in public - formats. Jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, and yuv. read files in the corresponding - formats and, by default, display them in the current window; options - cause them instead to convert the images to Plan 9 image format - and write them to standard output. Togif, - Toppm, and topng read Plan 9 images files, convert them to GIF, - PPM, or PNG, and write them to standard output. -
- - The default behavior of jpg, gif, and ppm is to display the file, - or standard input if no file is named. Once a file is displayed, - typing a character causes the program to display the next image. - Typing a q, DEL, or control-D exits the program. For a more user-friendly - interface, use page(1), which invokes these - programs to convert the images to standard format, displays them, - and offers scrolling, panning, and menu-driven navigation among - the files. -
- - These programs share many options:
- −e    Disable Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion, which is used to improve - the appearance of images on color-mapped displays, typically with - 8 bits per pixel. Primarily useful for debugging; if the display - has true RGB color, the image will be displayed in full glory.
- −k    Convert and display the image as a black and white (really grey-scale) - image.
- −v    Convert the image to an RGBV color-mapped image, even if the - display has true RGB color.
- −d    Suppress display of the image; this is set automatically by - any of the following options:
- −c    Convert the image to a Plan 9 representation, as defined by - image(7), and write it to standard output.
- −9    Like −c, but produce an uncompressed image. This saves processing - time, particularly when the output is being piped to another program - such as page(1), since it avoids compression and decompression.
- −t    Convert the image, if it is in color, to a true color RGB image.
- −3    Like −t, but force the image to RGB even if it is originally - grey-scale. -
- - Jpg has two extra options used to process the output of the LML - video card:
- −f    Merge two adjacent images, which represent the two fields of - a video picture, into a single image.
- −F    The input is a motion JPEG file, with multiple images representing - frames of the movie. Sets −f. -
- - The togif and toppm programs go the other way: they convert from - Plan 9 images to GIF and PPM, and have no display capability. - Both accept an option −c to set the comment field of the resulting - file. If there is only one input picture, togif converts the image - to GIF format. If there are many files, though, it will - assemble them into an animated GIF file. The options control this - process:
- −lloopcount
- -
- - By default, the animation will loop forever; loopcount specifies - how many times to loop. A value of zero means loop forever and - a negative value means to stop after playing the sequence once.
- -
- −dmsec
- -
- - By default, the images are displayed as fast as they can be rendered. - This option specifies the time, in milliseconds, to pause while - displaying the next named file. -
- - -
- Gif translates files that contain a ‘transparency’ index by attaching - an alpha channel to the converted image. -
- - Ico displays a Windows icon (.ico) file. If no file is specified, - ico reads from standard input. Icon files contain sets of icons - represeted by an image and a mask. Clicking the right button pops - up a menu that lets you write any icon’s image as a Plan 9 image - (widthxheight.image), write any icon’s mask as a Plan 9 - image (widthxheight.mask), or exit. Selecting one of the write - menu items yields a sight cursor. Move the sight over the icon - and right click again to write. -
- - Toico takes a list of Plan 9 image files (or standard input) and - creates a single icon file. The masks in the icon file will be - the white space in the image. The icon file is written to standard - output.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/jpg
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - page(1), image(7).
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Writing an animated GIF using togif is a clumsy undertaking.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/kill.html b/man/man1/kill.html deleted file mode 100644 index 107e438d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/kill.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -kill(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
KILL(1)KILL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - kill, slay, start, stop – print commands to manipulate processes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - kill name ... -
- - slay name ... -
- - start name ... -
- - stop name ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Kill prints commands that will cause all processes with name and - owned by the current user to be terminated. Each command is commented - with an output line from ps(1) describing the process that would - be killed. Use the send command of 9term(1), or pipe the output - of kill into rc(1) or sh(1) to execute the - commands. -
- - Kill suggests sending a Unix TERM signal to the process; sending - a KILL signal is a surer, if heavy handed, kill, but is necessary - if the offending process is ignoring signals. The slay command - prints commands to do this. -
- - Stop prints commands to pause execution of processes by sending - them the STOP signal. -
- - Start prints commands to restart stopped processes by sending - them the CONT signal.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ps(1), notify(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Stop and start should limit themselves to currently running or - stopped processes.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/label.html b/man/man1/label.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8c7999d4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/label.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ - -label(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LABEL(1)LABEL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - label, awd – set window label
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - label string
- awd
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Label sets the label of the current win (see acme(1)) or X terminal - window (e.g., 9term(1) or xterm(1)) by echoing a special control - sequence to standard output. -
- - Acme and 9term windows assume the label is a directory name. When - unrooted file names are plumbed in the window, they are evaluated - relative to the directory named in the label.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - One can use the following sh(1) function to keep the label up-to-date - in response to cd commands:
- -
- - _cd () {
- -
- - \cd "$@" &&
- case $− in
- *i*)
- awd
- esac
- -
- }
- alias cd=_cd
- cd .
- -
- - -
- Rc(1) installs a similar fn cd at startup if there is not already - a function named cd:
- -
- - fn cd {
- -
- - builtin cd $1 && flag i && awd
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/label
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/awd
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Awd is also documented in acme(1). -
- - Awd does not append the −label suffix that it does on Plan 9.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/lex.html b/man/man1/lex.html deleted file mode 100644 index e0f84d1e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/lex.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ - -lex(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LEX(1)LEX(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - lex – generator of lexical analysis programs
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - lex [ −tvn9 ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Lex generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of - text. The input files (standard input default) contain regular - expressions to be searched for and actions written in C to be - executed when expressions are found. -
- - A C source program, lex.yy.c is generated. This program, when - run, copies unrecognized portions of the input to the output, - and executes the associated C action for each regular expression - that is recognized. -
- - The options have the following meanings.
- −t    Place the result on the standard output instead of in file lex.yy.c.
- −v    Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated analyzer.
- −n    Opposite of −v; −n is default.
- −9    Adds code to be able to compile through the native C compilers.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - This program converts upper case to lower, removes blanks at the - end of lines, and replaces multiple blanks by single blanks. -
- - %%
- [A−Z]       putchar(yytext[0]+'a'−'A');
- [ ]+$
- [ ]+ putchar(' ');
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - lex.yy.c             output
- /sys/lib/lex/ncform   template
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - yacc(1), sed(1)
- M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, ‘LEX--Lexical Analyzer Generator’, Unix - Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/lex
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Cannot handle UTF. -
- - The asteroid to kill this dinosaur is still in orbit.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/look.html b/man/man1/look.html deleted file mode 100644 index cc8686d0..00000000 --- a/man/man1/look.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -look(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LOOK(1)LOOK(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - look – find lines in a sorted list
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - look [ −dfnixtc ] [ string ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Look consults a sorted file and prints all lines that begin with - string. It uses binary search. -
- - The following options are recognized. Options dfnt affect comparisons - as in sort(1).
- −i    Interactive. There is no string argument; instead look takes - lines from the standard input as strings to be looked up.
- −x    Exact. Print only lines of the file whose key matches string - exactly.
- −d    ‘Directory’ order: only letters, digits, tabs and blanks participate - in comparisons.
- −f    Fold. Upper case letters compare equal to lower case.
- −n    Numeric comparison with initial string of digits, optional minus - sign, and optional decimal point.
- −t[c]Character c terminates the sort key in the file. By default, - tab terminates the key. If c is missing the entire line comprises - the key. -
- - If no file is specified, /lib/words is assumed, with collating - sequence df.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /lib/words
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/look.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1), grep(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - The exit status is “not found” if no match is found, and “no dictionary” - if file or the default dictionary cannot be opened.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ls.html b/man/man1/ls.html deleted file mode 100644 index e5ed5566..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ls.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ - -ls(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LS(1)LS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ls, lc – list contents of directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ls [ −dlmnpqrstuFQ ] name ... -
- - lc [ −dlmnpqrstuFQ ] name ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - For each directory argument, ls lists the contents of the directory; - for each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information - requested. When no argument is given, the current directory is - listed. By default, the output is sorted alphabetically by name. - -
- - Lc is the same as ls, but sets the −p option and pipes the output - through mc(1). -
- - There are a number of options:
- −d    If argument is a directory, list it, not its contents.
- −l    List in long format, giving mode (see below), file system type - (e.g., for devices, the # code letter that names it; see intro(3)), - the instance or subdevice number, owner, group, size in bytes, - and time of last modification for each file.
- −m    List the name of the user who most recently modified the file.
- −n    Don’t sort the listing.
- −p    Print only the final path element of each file name.
- −q    List the qid (see stat(3)) of each file; the printed fields - are in the order path, version, and type.
- −r    Reverse the order of sort.
- −s    Give size in Kbytes for each entry.
- −t    Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of by name.
- −u    Under −t sort by time of last access; under −l print time of - last access.
- −F    Add the character / after all directory names and the character - * after all executable files.
- −L    Print the character t before each file if it has the temporary - flag set, and − otherwise.
- −Q    By default, printed file names are quoted if they contain characters - special to rc(1). The −Q flag disables this behavior. -
- - The mode printed under the −l option contains 11 characters, interpreted - as follows: the first character is
- d     if the entry is a directory;
- a     if the entry is an append-only file;
- −     if the entry is a plain file. -
- - The next letter is l if the file is exclusive access (one writer - or reader at a time). -
- - The last 9 characters are interpreted as three sets of three bits - each. The first set refers to owner permissions; the next to permissions - to others in the same user-group; and the last to all others. - Within each set the three characters indicate permission respectively - to read, to write, or to execute the file as a program. - For a directory, ‘execute’ permission is interpreted to mean permission - to search the directory for a specified file. The permissions - are indicated as follows:
- rif the file is readable;
- wif the file is writable;
- xif the file is executable;
- −if none of the above permissions is granted.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ls.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/lc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - stat(3), mc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/man.html b/man/man1/man.html deleted file mode 100644 index 41f472ab..00000000 --- a/man/man1/man.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,139 +0,0 @@ - -man(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MAN(1)MAN(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - man, lookman, sig – print or find pages of this manual
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - man [ option ... ] [ section ... ] title ... -
- - lookman key ... -
- - sig function ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Man locates and prints pages of this manual named title in the - specified sections. Title is given in lower case. Each section - is a number; pages marked (2S), for example, belong to chapter - 2. If no section is specified, pages in all sections are printed. - Any name from the NAME section at the top of the page will serve - as a - title. -
- - The options are:
- −p    Run proof(1) on the specified man pages.
- −P    Run page(1) on the specified man pages.
- −t    Run troff and send its output to standard output.
- −n    (Default) Print the pages on the standard output using nroff. - -
- - Lookman prints the names of all manual sections that contain all - of the key words given on the command line. -
- - Sig prints the signature (i.e. C definition) of the function’s - given on the command line.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/man?/*
- -
- - troff source for manual; this page is /usr/local/plan9/man/man1/man.1
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/man/man?/INDEX
- -
- - indices searched to find pages corresponding to titles
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/man/secindex
- -
- - command to make an index for a given section
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/man/lookman/index
- -
- - index for lookman
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/man
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/lookman
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - page(1), proof(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The manual was intended to be typeset; some detail is sacrificed - on text terminals. -
- - There is no automatic mechanism to keep the indices up to date. - -
- - Except for special cases, man doesn’t recognize things that should - be run through tbl and/or eqn.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/map.html b/man/man1/map.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6ed18ccb..00000000 --- a/man/man1/map.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,483 +0,0 @@ - -map(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MAP(1)MAP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - map, mapdemo, mapd – draw maps on various projections
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - map projection [ option ... ] -
- - mapdemo -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Map prepares on the standard output a map suitable for display - by any plotting filter described in plot(1). A menu of projections - is produced in response to an unknown projection. Mapdemo is a - short course in mapping. -
- - The default data for map are world shorelines. Option −f accesses - more detailed data classified by feature.
- −f [ feature ... ]
- -
- - Features are ranked 1 (default) to 4 from major to minor. Higher-numbered - ranks include all lower-numbered ones. Features are
- shore[1-4]      seacoasts, lakes, and islands; option −f always shows - shore1
- ilake[1-2]      intermittent lakes
- river[1-4]      rivers
- iriver[1-3]     intermittent rivers
- canal[1-3]      3=irrigation canals
- glacier
- iceshelf[12]
- reef
- saltpan[12]
- country[1-3]    2=disputed boundaries, 3=indefinite boundaries
- state          states and provinces (US and Canada only)
- -
- - -
- In other options coordinates are in degrees, with north latitude - and west longitude counted as positive.
- −l S N E W
- -
- - Set the southern and northern latitude and the eastern and western - longitude limits. Missing arguments are filled out from the list - –90, 90, –180, 180, or lesser limits suitable to the projection - at hand.
- -
- −k S N E W
- -
- - Set the scale as if for a map with limits −l S N E W . Do not - consider any −l or −w option in setting scale.
- -
- −o lat lon rot
- -
- - Orient the map in a nonstandard position. Imagine a transparent - gridded sphere around the globe. Turn the overlay about the North - Pole so that the Prime Meridian (longitude 0) of the overlay coincides - with meridian lon on the globe. Then tilt the North Pole of the - overlay along its Prime Meridian to latitude lat - on the globe. Finally again turn the overlay about its ‘North - Pole’ so that its Prime Meridian coincides with the previous position - of meridian rot. Project the map in the standard form appropriate - to the overlay, but presenting information from the underlying - globe. Missing arguments are filled out from the list - 90, 0, 0. In the absence of −o, the orientation is 90, 0, m, where - m is the middle of the longitude range.
- -
- −w S N E W
- -
- - Window the map by the specified latitudes and longitudes in the - tilted, rotated coordinate system. Missing arguments are filled - out from the list –90, 90, –180, 180. (It is wise to give an encompassing - −l option with −w. Otherwise for small windows computing time - varies inversely with area!) - -
- −d n   For speed, plot only every nth point.
- −r    Reverse left and right (good for star charts and inside-out - views).
- −v    Verso. Switch to a normally suppressed sheet of the map, such - as the back side of the earth in orthographic projection.
- −s1
- −s2   Superpose; outputs for a −s1 map (no closing) and a −s2 map - (no opening) may be concatenated.
- −g dlat dlon res
- -
- - Grid spacings are dlat, dlon. Zero spacing means no grid. Missing - dlat is taken to be zero. Missing dlon is taken the same as dlat. - Grid lines are drawn to a resolution of res (2° or less by default). - In the absence of −g, grid spacing is 10°.
- -
- −p lat lon extent
- -
- - Position the point lat, lon at the center of the plotting area. - Scale the map so that the height (and width) of the nominal plotting - area is extent times the size of one degree of latitude at the - center. By default maps are scaled and positioned to fit within - the plotting area. An extent overrides option −k. - -
- −c x y rot
- -
- - After all other positioning and scaling operations have been performed, - rotate the image rot degrees counterclockwise about the center - and move the center to position x, y, where the nominal plotting - area is –1≤x≤1, –1≤y≤1. Missing arguments are taken to be 0. −x Allow - the map to extend outside the - nominal plotting area.
- -
- −m [ file ... ]
- -
- - Use map data from named files. If no files are named, omit map - data. Names that do not exist as pathnames are looked up in a - standard directory, which contains, in addition to the data for - −f,
- -
- - world      World Data Bank I (default)
- states     US map from Census Bureau
- counties   US map from Census Bureau
- The environment variables MAP and MAPDIR change the default map - and default directory.
- -
- −b [lat0 lon0 lat1 lon1... ]
- -
- - Suppress the drawing of the normal boundary (defined by options - −l and −w). Coordinates, if present, define the vertices of a - polygon to which the map is clipped. If only two vertices are - given, they are taken to be the diagonal of a rectangle. To draw - the polygon, give its vertices as a −u track. - -
- −t file ...
- -
- - The files contain lists of points, given as latitude-longitude - pairs in degrees. If the first file is named −, the standard input - is taken instead. The points of each list are plotted as connected - ‘tracks’.
- Points in a track file may be followed by label strings. A label - breaks the track. A label may be prefixed by ", :, or ! and is - terminated by a newline. An unprefixed string or a string prefixed - with " is displayed at the designated point. The first word of - a : or ! string names a special symbol (see option −y). - An optional numerical second word is a scale factor for the size - of the symbol, 1 by default. A : symbol is aligned with its top - to the north; a ! symbol is aligned vertically on the page.
- -
- −u file ...
- -
- - Same as −t, except the tracks are unbroken lines. (−t tracks appear - as dot-dashed lines if the plotting filter supports them.)
- -
- −y file
- -
- - The file contains plot(7)-style data for : or ! labels in −t or - −u files. Each symbol is defined by a comment :name then a sequence - of m and v commands. Coordinates (0,0) fall on the plotting point. - Default scaling is as if the nominal plotting range were ra −1 - −1 1 1; ra commands in file change the - scaling.
- -
-

Projections
- Equatorial projections centered on the Prime Meridian (longitude - 0). Parallels are straight horizontal lines. -
- - mercator         equally spaced straight meridians, conformal, straight - compass courses
- sinusoidal       equally spaced parallels, equal-area, same as bonne - 0.
- cylequalarea lat0   equally spaced straight meridians, equal-area, - true scale on lat0
- cylindrical      central projection on tangent cylinder
- rectangular lat0   equally spaced parallels, equally spaced straight - meridians, true scale on lat0
- gall lat0          parallels spaced stereographically on prime meridian, - equally spaced straight meridians, true scale on lat0
- mollweide        (homalographic) equal-area, hemisphere is a circle
- -
- - -
- - gilbert() sphere conformally mapped on hemisphere and viewed orthographically
- -
- -
- gilbert          globe mapped conformally on hemisphere, viewed orthographically - -
- - Azimuthal projections centered on the North Pole. Parallels are - concentric circles. Meridians are equally spaced radial lines. - -
- - azequidistant     equally spaced parallels, true distances from pole
- azequalarea      equal-area
- gnomonic         central projection on tangent plane, straight great circles
- perspective dist   viewed along earth’s axis dist earth radii from - center of earth
- orthographic      viewed from infinity
- stereographic     conformal, projected from opposite pole
- laueradius = tan(2×colatitude), used in X-ray crystallography
- fisheye n         stereographic seen from just inside medium with refractive - index n
- newyorker rradius = log(colatitude/r): New Yorker map from viewing - pedestal of radius r degrees -
- - Polar conic projections symmetric about the Prime Meridian. Parallels - are segments of concentric circles. Except in the Bonne projection, - meridians are equally spaced radial lines orthogonal to the parallels. - -
- - conic lat0         central projection on cone tangent at lat0
- simpleconic lat0 lat1
- -
- - -
- - equally spaced parallels, true scale on lat0 and lat1
- -
- -
- lambert lat0 lat1    conformal, true scale on lat0 and lat1
- albers lat0 lat1     equal-area, true scale on lat0 and lat1
- bonne lat0         equally spaced parallels, equal-area, parallel lat0 - developed from tangent cone -
- - Projections with bilateral symmetry about the Prime Meridian and - the equator. -
- - polyconic        parallels developed from tangent cones, equally spaced - along Prime Meridian
- aitoff           equal-area projection of globe onto 2-to-1 ellipse, based - on azequalarea
- lagrange         conformal, maps whole sphere into a circle
- bicentric lon0     points plotted at true azimuth from two centers - on the equator at longitudes ±lon0, great circles are straight - lines (a stretched gnomonic )
- elliptic lon0      points plotted at true distance from two centers - on the equator at longitudes ±lon0
- globular         hemisphere is circle, circular arc meridians equally spaced - on equator, circular arc parallels equally spaced on 0- and 90-degree - meridians
- vandergrinten     sphere is circle, meridians as in globular, circular - arc parallels resemble mercator -
- - Doubly periodic conformal projections. -
- - guyou            W and E hemispheres are square
- square           world is square with Poles at diagonally opposite corners
- tetra            map on tetrahedron with edge tangent to Prime Meridian at - S Pole, unfolded into equilateral triangle
- hex              world is hexagon centered on N Pole, N and S hemispheres are - equilateral triangles -
- - Miscellaneous projections. -
- - harrison dist angleoblique perspective from above the North Pole, - dist earth radii from center of earth, looking along the Date - Line angle degrees off vertical
- trapezoidal lat0 lat1
- -
- - -
- - equally spaced parallels, straight meridians equally spaced along - parallels, true scale at lat0 and lat1 on Prime Meridian
- lune(lat,angle) conformal, polar cap above latitude lat maps to - convex lune with given angle at 90°E and 90°W -
- - -
- -
- Retroazimuthal projections. At every point the angle between vertical - and a straight line to ‘Mecca’, latitude lat0 on the prime meridian, - is the true bearing of Mecca. -
- - mecca lat0         equally spaced vertical meridians
- homing lat0        distances to Mecca are true -
- - Maps based on the spheroid. Of geodetic quality, these projections - do not make sense for tilted orientations. For descriptions, see - corresponding maps above. -
- - sp_mercator
- sp_albers lat0 lat1
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - map perspective 1.025 −o 40.75 74
- -
- - A view looking down on New York from 100 miles (0.025 of the 4000-mile - earth radius) up. The job can be done faster by limiting the map - so as not to ‘plot’ the invisible part of the world: map perspective - 1.025 −o 40.75 74 −l 20 60 30 100. A circular border can be forced - by adding option - −w 77.33. (Latitude 77.33° falls just inside a polar cap of opening - angle arccos(1/1.025) = 12.6804°.)
- -
- map mercator −o 49.25 −106 180
- -
- - An ‘equatorial’ map of the earth centered on New York. The pole - of the map is placed 90° away (40.75+49.25=90) on the other side - of the earth. A 180° twist around the pole of the map arranges - that the ‘Prime Meridian’ of the map runs from the pole of the - map over the North Pole to New York instead of - down the back side of the earth. The same effect can be had from -    map mercator −o 130.75 74
- -
- map albers 28 45 −l 20 50 60 130 −m states
- -
- - A customary curved-latitude map of the United States.
- -
- map harrison 2 30 −l −90 90 120 240 −o 90 0 0
- -
- - A fan view covering 60° on either side of the Date Line, as seen - from one earth radius above the North Pole gazing at the earth’s - limb, which is 30° off vertical. The −o option overrides the default - −o 90 0 180, which would rotate the scene to behind the observer.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /lib/map/[1−4]??   World Data Bank II, for −f
- /lib/map/*         maps for −m
- /lib/map/*.x       map indexes
- mapd              Map driver program
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/map
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - map(7), plot(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - ‘Map seems to be empty’--a coarse survey found zero extent within - the −l and −w bounds; for maps of limited extent the grid resolution, - res, or the limits may have to be refined.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Windows (option −w) cannot cross the Date Line. No borders appear - along edges arising from visibility limits. Segments that cross - a border are dropped, not clipped. Excessively large scale or - −d setting may cause long line segments to be dropped. Map tries - to draw grid lines dotted and −t tracks dot-dashed. As - very few plotting filters properly support curved textured lines, - these lines are likely to appear solid. The west-longitude-positive - convention betrays Yankee chauvinism. Gilbert should be a map - from sphere to sphere, independent of the mapping from sphere - to plane.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/mc.html b/man/man1/mc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1c133aec..00000000 --- a/man/man1/mc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ - -mc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MC(1)MC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mc – multicolumn print
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - mc [ − ] [ −N ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mc splits the input into as many columns as will fit in N print - positions. If run in a 9term(1), xterm(1), or acme(1) window, - the default N is the number of blanks that will fit across the - window; otherwise the default N is 80. Under option − each input - line ending in a colon : is printed separately. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/mc.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), acme(1), acme(4), xterm(1), pr(1), lc in ls(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/mk.1 b/man/man1/mk.1 index 6ef12499..0698ef5b 100644 --- a/man/man1/mk.1 +++ b/man/man1/mk.1 @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ x.tab.h:Pcmp -s: y.tab.h cp y.tab.h x.tab.h .EE .SH SOURCE -.B /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mk +.B \*9/src/cmd/mk .SH SEE ALSO .IR sh (1), .IR regexp (7) diff --git a/man/man1/mk.html b/man/man1/mk.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3dde6143..00000000 --- a/man/man1/mk.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,621 +0,0 @@ - -mk(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MK(1)MK(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mk – maintain (make) related files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - mk [ −f mkfile ] ... [ option ... ] [ target ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mk uses the dependency rules specified in mkfile to control the - update (usually by compilation) of targets (usually files) from - the source files upon which they depend. The mkfile (default mkfile) - contains a rule for each target that identifies the files and - other targets upon which it depends and an sh(1) script, a - recipe, to update the target. The script is run if the target - does not exist or if it is older than any of the files it depends - on. Mkfile may also contain meta-rules that define actions for - updating implicit targets. If no target is specified, the target - of the first rule (not meta-rule) in mkfile is updated. -
- - The environment variable $NPROC determines how many targets may - be updated simultaneously; Some operating systems, e.g., Plan - 9, set $NPROC automatically to the number of CPUs on the current - machine. -
- - Options are:
- −a       Assume all targets to be out of date. Thus, everything is updated.
- −d[egp]   Produce debugging output (p is for parsing, g for graph - building, e for execution).
- −e       Explain why each target is made.
- −i       Force any missing intermediate targets to be made.
- −k       Do as much work as possible in the face of errors.
- −n       Print, but do not execute, the commands needed to update the - targets.
- −s       Make the command line arguments sequentially rather than in - parallel.
- −t       Touch (update the modified date of) file targets, without executing - any recipes.
- −wtarget1,target2,...
- -
- - -
- - Pretend the modify time for each target is the current time; useful - in conjunction with −n to learn what updates would be triggered - by modifying the targets.
- -
- -
-

The mkfile
- A mkfile consists of assignments (described under ‘Environment’) - and rules. A rule contains targets and a tail. A target is a literal - string and is normally a file name. The tail contains zero or - more prerequisites and an optional recipe, which is an shell script. - Each line of the recipe must begin with white space. A rule - takes the form
- -
- - target: prereq1 prereq2
- -
- - recipe using prereq1, prereq2 to build target
- -
- - -
- -
- When the recipe is executed, the first character on every line - is elided. -
- - After the colon on the target line, a rule may specify attributes, - described below. -
- - A meta-rule has a target of the form A%B where A and B are (possibly - empty) strings. A meta-rule acts as a rule for any potential target - whose name matches A%B with % replaced by an arbitrary string, - called the stem. In interpreting a meta-rule, the stem is substituted - for all occurrences of % in the prerequisite - names. In the recipe of a meta-rule, the environment variable - $stem contains the string matched by the %. For example, a meta-rule - to compile a C program using 9c(1) might be:
- -
- - %:      %.c
- -
- - 9c −c $stem.c
- 9l −o $stem $stem.o
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- Meta-rules may contain an ampersand & rather than a percent sign - %. A % matches a maximal length string of any characters; an & - matches a maximal length string of any characters except period - or slash. -
- - The text of the mkfile is processed as follows. Lines beginning - with < followed by a file name are replaced by the contents of - the named file. Lines beginning with <| followed by a file name - are replaced by the output of the execution of the named file. - Blank lines and comments, which run from unquoted # characters - to the following newline, are deleted. The character sequence - backslash-newline is deleted, so long lines in mkfile may be folded. - Non-recipe lines are processed by substituting for `{command} - the output of the command when run by sh. References to variables - are replaced by the variables’ values. Special - characters may be quoted using single quotes '' as in sh(1). -
- - Assignments and rules are distinguished by the first unquoted - occurrence of : (rule) or = (assignment). -
- - A later rule may modify or override an existing rule under the - following conditions:
- –     If the targets of the rules exactly match and one rule contains - only a prerequisite clause and no recipe, the clause is added - to the prerequisites of the other rule. If either or both targets - are virtual, the recipe is always executed.
- –     If the targets of the rules match exactly and the prerequisites - do not match and both rules contain recipes, mk reports an “ambiguous - recipe” error.
- –     If the target and prerequisites of both rules match exactly, the - second rule overrides the first.
-

Environment
- Rules may make use of shell environment variables. A legal reference - of the form $OBJ or ${name} is expanded as in sh(1). A reference - of the form ${name:A%B=C%D}, where A, B, C, D are (possibly empty) - strings, has the value formed by expanding $name and substituting - C for A and D for B in each word in - $name that matches pattern A%B. -
- - Variables can be set by assignments of the form
- -
- - var=[attr=]value
- -
- Blanks in the value break it into words. Such variables are exported - to the environment of recipes as they are executed, unless U, - the only legal attribute attr, is present. The initial value of - a variable is taken from (in increasing order of precedence) the - default values below, mk’s environment, the mkfiles, and any - command line assignment as an argument to mk. A variable assignment - argument overrides the first (but not any subsequent) assignment - to that variable. -
- - The variable MKFLAGS contains all the option arguments (arguments - starting with − or containing =) and MKARGS contains all the targets - in the call to mk. -
- - The variable MKSHELL contains the shell command line mk uses to - run recipes. If the first word of the command ends in rc or rcsh, - mk uses rc(1)’s quoting rules; otherwise it uses sh(1)’s. The - MKSHELL variable is consulted when the mkfile is read, not when - it is executed, so that different shells can be used within - a single mkfile:
- -
- - MKSHELL=$PLAN9/bin/rc
- use−rc:V:
- -
- - for(i in a b c) echo $i
- -
- MKSHELL=sh
- use−sh:V:
- -
- - for i in a b c; do echo $i; done
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- Mkfiles included via < or <| (q.v.) see their own private copy of - MKSHELL, which always starts set to sh . -
- - Dynamic information may be included in the mkfile by using a line - of the form
- -
- - <|command args -
- - -
- This runs the command command with the given arguments args and - pipes its standard output to mk to be included as part of the - mkfile. For instance, the Inferno kernels use this technique to - run a shell command with an awk script and a configuration file - as arguments in order for the awk script to process the file - and output a set of variables and their values.
-

Execution
- -
- - During execution, mk determines which targets must be updated, - and in what order, to build the names specified on the command - line. It then runs the associated recipes. -
- - A target is considered up to date if it has no prerequisites or - if all its prerequisites are up to date and it is newer than all - its prerequisites. Once the recipe for a target has executed, - the target is considered up to date. -
- - The date stamp used to determine if a target is up to date is - computed differently for different types of targets. If a target - is virtual (the target of a rule with the V attribute), its date - stamp is initially zero; when the target is updated the date stamp - is set to the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites. Otherwise, - if a - target does not exist as a file, its date stamp is set to the - most recent date stamp of its prerequisites, or zero if it has - no prerequisites. Otherwise, the target is the name of a file - and the target’s date stamp is always that file’s modification - date. The date stamp is computed when the target is needed in - the execution of - a rule; it is not a static value. -
- - Nonexistent targets that have prerequisites and are themselves - prerequisites are treated specially. Such a target t is given - the date stamp of its most recent prerequisite and if this causes - all the targets which have t as a prerequisite to be up to date, - t is considered up to date. Otherwise, t is made in the normal - fashion. - The −i flag overrides this special treatment. -
- - Files may be made in any order that respects the preceding restrictions. - -
- - A recipe is executed by supplying the recipe as standard input - to the command /bin/sh. (Note that unlike make, mk feeds the entire - recipe to the shell rather than running each line of the recipe - separately.) The environment is augmented by the following variables:
- $alltarget
- -
- - -
- - all the targets of this rule.
- -
- -
- $newprereq
- -
- - -
- - the prerequisites that caused this rule to execute.
- -
- -
- $newmember
- -
- - -
- - the prerequisites that are members of an aggregate that caused - this rule to execute. When the prerequisites of a rule are members - of an aggregate, $newprereq contains the name of the aggregate - and out of date members, while $newmember contains only the name - of the members. - -
- -
- $nproc     the process slot for this recipe. It satisfies 0≤$nproc<$NPROC.
- $pid       the process id for the mk executing the recipe.
- $prereq    all the prerequisites for this rule.
- $stem      if this is a meta-rule, $stem is the string that matched - % or &. Otherwise, it is empty. For regular expression meta-rules - (see below), the variables stem0, ..., stem9 are set to the corresponding - subexpressions.
- $target    the targets for this rule that need to be remade. -
- - These variables are available only during the execution of a recipe, - not while evaluating the mkfile. -
- - Unless the rule has the Q attribute, the recipe is printed prior - to execution with recognizable environment variables expanded. - Commands returning error status cause mk to terminate. -
- - Recipes and backquoted rc commands in places such as assignments - execute in a copy of mk’s environment; changes they make to environment - variables are not visible from mk. -
- - Variable substitution in a rule is done when the rule is read; - variable substitution in the recipe is done when the recipe is - executed. For example:
- -
- - bar=a.c
- foo: $bar
- -
- - $CC −o foo $bar
- -
- bar=b.c
- -
- - -
- will compile b.c into foo, if a.c is newer than foo.
-

Aggregates
- Names of the form a(b) refer to member b of the aggregate a. Currently, - the only aggregates supported are 9ar (see 9c(1)) archives.
-

Attributes
- The colon separating the target from the prerequisites may be - immediately followed by attributes and another colon. The attributes - are:
- D     If the recipe exits with a non-null status, the target is deleted.
- E     Continue execution if the recipe draws errors.
- N     If there is no recipe, the target has its time updated.
- n     The rule is a meta-rule that cannot be a target of a virtual - rule. Only files match the pattern in the target.
- P     The characters after the P until the terminating : are taken - as a program name. It will be invoked as sh −c prog 'arg1' 'arg2' - and should return a zero exit status if and only if arg1 is up - to date with respect to arg2. Date stamps are still propagated - in the normal way.
- Q     The recipe is not printed prior to execution.
- R     The rule is a meta-rule using regular expressions. In the rule, - % has no special meaning. The target is interpreted as a regular - expression as defined in regexp(7). The prerequisites may contain - references to subexpressions in form \n, as in the substitute - command of sed(1).
- U     The targets are considered to have been updated even if the recipe - did not do so.
- V     The targets of this rule are marked as virtual. They are distinct - from files of the same name.
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - A simple mkfile to compile a program:
- -
- - </$objtype/mkfile
- prog: a.$O b.$O c.$O
- -
- - $LD $LDFLAGS −o $target $prereq
- -
- %.$O: %.c
- -
- - $CC $CFLAGS $stem.c
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- Override flag settings in the mkfile:
- -
- - % mk target 'CFLAGS=−S −w'
- -
- - -
- Maintain a library:
- -
- - libc.a(%.$O):N:    %.$O
- libc.a:      libc.a(abs.$O) libc.a(access.$O) libc.a(alarm.$O) ...
- -
- - ar r libc.a $newmember
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- String expression variables to derive names from a master list:
- -
- - NAMES=alloc arc bquote builtins expand main match mk var word
- OBJ=${NAMES:%=%.$O}
- -
- - -
- Regular expression meta-rules:
- -
- - ([^/]*)/(.*)\.$O:R:    \1/\2.c
- -
- - cd $stem1; $CC $CFLAGS $stem2.c
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- A correct way to deal with yacc(1) grammars. The file lex.c includes - the file x.tab.h rather than y.tab.h in order to reflect changes - in content, not just modification time.
- -
- - lex.$O:      x.tab.h
- x.tab.h:     y.tab.h
- -
- - cmp −s x.tab.h y.tab.h || cp y.tab.h x.tab.h
- -
- y.tab.c y.tab.h: gram.y
- -
- - $YACC −d gram.y
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- The above example could also use the P attribute for the x.tab.h - rule:
- -
- - x.tab.h:Pcmp −s: y.tab.h
- -
- - cp y.tab.h x.tab.h
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mk
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sh(1), regexp(7) -
- - A. Hume, “Mk: a Successor to Make” (Tenth Edition Research Unix - Manuals). -
- - Andrew G. Hume and Bob Flandrena, “Maintaining Files on Plan 9 - with Mk”. DOCPREFIX/doc/mk.pdf
- -
-

HISTORY
- -
- - Andrew Hume wrote mk for Tenth Edition Research Unix. It was later - ported to Plan 9. This software is a port of the Plan 9 version - back to Unix.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Identical recipes for regular expression meta-rules only have - one target. -
- - Seemingly appropriate input like CFLAGS=−DHZ=60 is parsed as an - erroneous attribute; correct it by inserting a space after the - first =. -
- - The recipes printed by mk before being passed to the shell for - execution are sometimes erroneously expanded for printing. Don’t - trust what’s printed; rely on what the shell does.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/mkdir.html b/man/man1/mkdir.html deleted file mode 100644 index 489d8b91..00000000 --- a/man/man1/mkdir.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -mkdir(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MKDIR(1)MKDIR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mkdir – make a directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - mkdir [ −p ] [ −m mode ] dirname ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mkdir creates the specified directories. It requires write permission - in the parent directory. -
- - If the −p flag is given, mkdir creates any necessary parent directories - and does not complain if the target directory already exists. - -
- - The −m flag sets the permissions to be used when creating the - directory. The default is 0777.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rm(1)
- cd in rc(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mkdir.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Mkdir returns null exit status if all directories were successfully - made. Otherwise it prints a diagnostic and returns "error" status.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/namespace.html b/man/man1/namespace.html deleted file mode 100644 index 45ae83bc..00000000 --- a/man/man1/namespace.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ - -namespace(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NAMESPACE(1)NAMESPACE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - namespace – print name space directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - namespace
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Namespace prints the directory representing the current name space. - See intro(4).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/namespace.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - getns(3), intro(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/news.html b/man/man1/news.html deleted file mode 100644 index 29cede42..00000000 --- a/man/man1/news.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ - -news(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NEWS(1)NEWS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - news – print news items
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - news [ −a ] [ −n ] [ item ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - When invoked without options, this simple local news service prints - files that have appeared in /lib/news since last reading, most - recent first, with each preceded by an appropriate header. The - time of reading is recorded. The options are
- −a    Print all items, regardless of currency. The recorded time is - not changed.
- −n    Report the names of the current items without printing their - contents, and without changing the recorded time. -
- - Other arguments select particular news items. -
- - To post a news item, create a file in /usr/local/plan9/news. -
- - Empty news items, and news items named core or dead.letter are - ignored.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/news/*
- -
- - articles
- -
- $HOME/lib/newstime
- -
- - modify time is time news was last read who gets news mailed to - them
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/news.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/p.html b/man/man1/p.html deleted file mode 100644 index a2339d2f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/p.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -p(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
P(1)P(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - p – paginate
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - p [ −number ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - P copies its standard input, or the named files if given, to its - standard output, stopping at the end of every 22nd line, and between - files, to wait for a newline from the user. The option sets the - number of lines on a page. -
- - While waiting for a newline, p interprets the commands:
- !     Pass the rest of the line to the shell as a command.
- q     Quit. -
- - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/p.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/page.html b/man/man1/page.html deleted file mode 100644 index 91b48993..00000000 --- a/man/man1/page.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ - -page(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PAGE(1)PAGE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - img, psv – view FAX, image, graphic, PostScript, PDF, and typesetter - output files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - page [ file... ] -
- - img file.bit -
- - psv file.ps -
- - psv file.pdf
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plan 9’s page(1) is not ported. Instead, page is a script that - invokes qiv(1) to view graphic files or psv to view PostScript - and PDF. On Mac OS X, page invokes Preview to handle all files. - -
- - Img is a simple image viewer for Plan 9 images (see image(7)). - -
- - Psv is a PostScript and PDF viewer. It is a streamlined interface - to gv(1). -
- - To view troff output, use proof(1).
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - gs(1), gv(1), jpg(1), proof(1), tex(1), troff(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/img.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/psv
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - When using Preview on Mac OS X, page leaves temporary files in - /var/tmp, since it has no way to know when the viewer has exited. - -
- - Page does not handle Plan 9 image(7) files; use img explicitly.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/pic.html b/man/man1/pic.html deleted file mode 100644 index acba241b..00000000 --- a/man/man1/pic.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,435 +0,0 @@ - -pic(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PIC(1)PIC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pic, tpic – troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - pic [ files ] -
- - tpic [ files ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pic is a troff(1) preprocessor for drawing figures on a typesetter. - Pic code is contained between .PS and .PE lines:
- -
- - .PS optional-width optional-height
- element-list
- .PE
- -
- - -
- or in a file mentioned in a .PS line:
- -
- - .PS <file -
- - -
- If optional-width is present, the picture is made that many inches - wide, regardless of any dimensions used internally. The height - is scaled in the same proportion unless optional-height is present. - If .PF is used instead of .PE, the typesetting position after - printing is restored to what it was upon entry. -
- - An element-list is a list of elements:
- -
- - primitive attribute-list
- placename : element
- placename : position
- var = expr
- direction
- { element-list }
- [ element-list ]
- for var = expr to expr by expr do { anything }
- if expr then { anything } else { anything }
- copy file,    copy thru macro,    copy file thru macro
- sh { commandline }
- print expr
- reset optional var-list
- troff-command
- -
- - -
- Elements are separated by newlines or semicolons; a long element - may be continued by ending the line with a backslash. Comments - are introduced by a # and terminated by a newline. Variable names - begin with a lower case letter; place names begin with upper case. - Place and variable names retain their values from - one picture to the next. -
- - After each primitive the current position moves in the current - direction (up,down, left,right (default)) by the size of the primitive. - The current position and direction are saved upon entry to a {...} - block and restored upon exit. Elements within a block enclosed - in [...] are treated as a unit; the dimensions are - determined by the extreme points of the contained objects. Names, - variables, and direction of motion within a block are local to - that block. -
- - Troff-command is any line that begins with a period. Such a line - is assumed to make sense in the context where it appears; generally, - this means only size and font changes. -
- - The primitive objects are:
- -
- - box    circle    ellipse    arc    line    arrow    spline    move    text-list
- -
- arrow is a synonym for line −>. -
- - An attribute-list is a sequence of zero or more attributes; each - attribute consists of a keyword, perhaps followed by a value.
- -
- - -
- - h(eigh)t expr           wid(th) expr
- rad(ius) expr           diam(eter) expr
- up opt-expr              down opt-expr
- right opt-expr           left opt-expr
- from position             to position
- at position               with corner
- by expr, expr             then
- dotted opt-expr          dashed opt-expr
- chop opt-expr            −>    <−    <−>
- invis                  same
- fill opt-expr
- text-list                 expr
- -
- -
- Missing attributes and values are filled in from defaults. Not - all attributes make sense for all primitives; irrelevant ones - are silently ignored. The attribute at causes the geometrical - center to be put at the specified place; with causes the position - on the object to be put at the specified place. For lines, splines - and - arcs, height and width refer to arrowhead size. A bare expr implies - motion in the current direction. -
- - Text is normally an attribute of some primitive; by default it - is placed at the geometrical center of the object. Stand-alone - text is also permitted. A text list is a list of text items:
- -
- - text-item:
- -
- - "..." -
- -
- - positioning ...
- sprintf("format", expr, ...) positioning ...
- -
- positioning:
- -
- - center    ljust    rjust    above    below
- -
- -
- If there are multiple text items for some primitive, they are - arranged vertically and centered except as qualified. Positioning - requests apply to each item independently. Text items may contain - troff commands for size and font changes, local motions, etc., - but make sure that these are balanced so that the entering state - is restored before exiting. -
- - A position is ultimately an x,y coordinate pair, but it may be - specified in other ways.
- -
- - position:
- -
- - expr, expr
- place ± expr, expr
- place ± ( expr, expr )
- ( position, position )        x from one, y the other
- expr [of the way] between position and position
- expr < position , position >
- ( position )
- -
- - -
- place:
- -
- - placename optional-corner
- corner of placename
- nth primitive optional-corner
- corner of nth primitive
- Here
- -
- -
- An optional-corner is one of the eight compass points or the center - or the start or end of a primitive.
- -
- - optional-corner:
- -
- - .n    .e    .w    .s    .ne    .se    .nw    .sw    .c    .start    .end
- -
- corner:
- -
- - top    bot    left    right    start    end
- -
- -
- Each object in a picture has an ordinal number; nth refers to - this.
- -
- - nth:
- -
- - nth,    nth last
- -
- - -
- -
- The built-in variables and their default values are:
- -
- - -
- - boxwid 0.75            boxht 0.5
- circlerad 0.25          arcrad 0.25
- ellipsewid 0.75         ellipseht 0.5
- linewid 0.5            lineht 0.5
- movewid 0.5            moveht 0.5
- textwid 0              textht 0
- arrowwid 0.05           arrowht 0.1
- dashwid 0.1            arrowhead 2
- scale 1
- -
- -
- These may be changed at any time, and the new values remain in - force from picture to picture until changed again or reset by - a reset statement. Variables changed within [ and ] revert to - their previous value upon exit from the block. Dimensions are - divided by scale during output. -
- - Expressions in pic are evaluated in floating point. All numbers - representing dimensions are taken to be in inches.
- -
- - expr:
- -
- - expr op expr
- − expr
- ! expr
- ( expr )
- variable
- number
- place .x    place .y    place .ht    place .wid    place .rad
- sin(expr)    cos(expr)    atan2(expr,expr)    log(expr)    exp(expr)
- sqrt(expr)    max(expr,expr)    min(expr,expr)    int(expr)    rand()
- -
- op:
- -
- - +    −    *    /    %    <    <=    >    >=    ==    !=    &&    ||
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- The define and undef statements are not part of the grammar.
- -
- - -
- - define name { replacement text }
- undef name
- -
- -
- Occurrences of $1, $2, etc., in the replacement text will be replaced - by the corresponding arguments if name is invoked as
- -
- - -
- - name(arg1, arg2, ...)
- -
- -
- Non-existent arguments are replaced by null strings. Replacement - text may contain newlines. The undef statement removes the definition - of a macro. -
- - Tpic is a tex(1) preprocessor that accepts pic language. It produces - Tex commands that define a box called \graph, which contains the - picture. The box may be output this way:
- -
- - \centerline{\box\graph}
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above
- move
- A: ellipse
- -
- - circle rad .1 with .w at A.e
- circle rad .05 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- circle rad .065 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- spline from last circle.nw left .25 then left .05 down .05
- arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5
- for i = 1 to 10 do { line from A.s+.025*i,.01*i down i/50 }
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above move A: ellipse
- -
- - circle rad .1 with .w at A.e
- circle rad .05 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- circle rad .065 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- spline from last circle.nw left .25 then left .05 down .05
- arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5
- for i = 1 to 10 do { line from A.s+.025*i,.01*i down i/50 }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/pic
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - grap(1), doctype(1), troff(1)
- B. W. Kernighan, “PIC--a Graphics Language for Typesetting”, Unix - Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/plot.html b/man/man1/plot.html deleted file mode 100644 index b93d6d34..00000000 --- a/man/man1/plot.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ - -plot(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLOT(1)PLOT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plot – graphics filter
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - plot [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plot interprets plotting instructions (see plot(7)) from the files - or standard input, drawing the results in a newly created rio(1) - window. Plot persists until a newline is typed in the window. - Various options may be interspersed with the file arguments; they - take effect at the given point in processing. Options are: - −d        Double buffer: accumulate the plot off-screen and write to the - screen all at once when an erase command is encountered or at - end of file.
- −e        Erase the screen.
- −c col     Set the foreground color (see plot(7) for color names).
- −f fill     Set the background color.
- −g grade   Set the quality factor for arcs. Higher grades give better - quality.
- −p col     Set the pen color.
- −w        Pause until a newline is typed on standard input.
- −C        Close the current plot.
- −W    x0,y0,x1,y1
- -
- - -
- - Specify the bounding rectangle of plot’s window. By default it - uses a 512x512 window in the middle of the screen.
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/plot
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rio(1), plot(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/plumb.html b/man/man1/plumb.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2a868f7a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/plumb.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ - -plumb(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLUMB(1)PLUMB(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plumb – send message to plumber
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - plumb [ −p plumbfile ] [ −a attributes ] [ −s source ] [ −d destination - ] [ −t type ] [ −w directory ] −i | data...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The plumb command formats and sends a plumbing message whose data - is, by default, the concatenation of the argument strings separated - by blanks. The options are:
- −p    write the message to plumbfile (default /mnt/plumb/send).
- −a    set the attr field of the message (default is empty).
- −s    set the src field of the message (default is plumb).
- −d    set the dst field of the message (default is empty).
- −t    set the type field of the message (default is text).
- −w    set the wdir field of the message (default is the current working - directory of plumb).
- −i    take the data from standard input rather than the argument strings. - If an action= attribute is not otherwise specified, plumb will - add an action=showdata attribute to the message.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/lib/plumbing   default rules file
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/plumb
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumb(3), plumber(4), plumb(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/pr.html b/man/man1/pr.html deleted file mode 100644 index ca8772b2..00000000 --- a/man/man1/pr.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ - -pr(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PR(1)PR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pr – print file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - pr [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pr produces a printed listing of one or more files on its standard - output. The output is separated into pages headed by a date, the - name of the file or a specified header, and the page number. With - no file arguments, pr prints its standard input. -
- - Options apply to all following files but may be reset between - files:
- −n    Produce n-column output.
- +n    Begin printing with page n.
- −b    Balance columns on last page, in case of multi-column output.
- −d    Double space.
- −en   Set the tab stops for input text every n spaces.
- −h    Take the next argument as a page header (file by default).
- −in   Replace sequences of blanks in the output by tabs, using tab - stops set every n spaces.
- −f    Use form feeds to separate pages.
- −ln   Take the length of the page to be n lines instead of the default - 66.
- −m    Print all files simultaneously, each in one column.
- −nm   Number the lines of each file. The numeric argument m, default - 5, sets the width of the line-number field.
- −on   Offset the left margin n character positions.
- −p    Pad each file printed to an odd number of pages. For two-sided - printers, this will ensure each file will start a new page.
- −sc   Separate columns by the single character c instead of aligning - them with white space. A missing c is taken to be a tab.
- −t    Do not print the 5-line header or the 5-line trailer normally - supplied for each page.
- −wn   For multi-column output, take the width of the page to be n - characters instead of the default 72.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/pr.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cat(1), lp(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/proof.html b/man/man1/proof.html deleted file mode 100644 index a442fd71..00000000 --- a/man/man1/proof.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ - -proof(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PROOF(1)PROOF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - proof – troff output interpreter
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - proof [ −mmag ] [ −/nview ] [ −F dir ] [ −d ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Proof reads troff(1) intermediate language from file or standard - input and simulates the resulting pages on the screen. -
- - After a page of text is displayed, proof pauses for a command - from the keyboard. The typed commands are:
- newlineGo on to next page of text.
- −      Go back to the previous page.
- q      Quit.
- pn     Print page n. An out-of-bounds page number means the end nearer - to that number; a missing number means the current page; a signed - number means an offset to the current page.
- n      Same as pn.
- c      Clear the screen, then wait for another command.
- mmag   Change the magnification at which the output is printed. Normally - it is printed with magnification .9; mag=.5 shrinks it to half - size; mag=2 doubles the size.
- xval    Move everything val screen pixels to the right (left, if val - is negative).
- yval    Move everything val screen pixels down (up, if val is negative).
- /nview   Split the window into nview pieces. The current page goes - into the rightmost, bottommost piece, and previous pages are shown - in the other pieces.
- −F dirUse dir for fonts instead of /lib/font/bit.
- d      Toggle the debug flag. -
- - These commands are also available, under slightly different form, - from a menu on button 3. The pan menu item allows arbitrary positioning - of the page: after selecting pan, press the mouse button again - and hold it down while moving the page to the desired location. - The page will be redisplayed in its entirety when - the button is released. Mouse button 1 also pans, without the - need for selecting from a menu. -
- - The m, x, y, F, /, and d commands are also available as command - line options.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/font/*
- -
- - fonts
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/font/MAP
- -
- - how to convert troff output fonts and character names into screen - fonts and character numbers
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/proof
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - lp(1), gs(1), page(1)
- J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, “Troff User’s Manual”
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ps.html b/man/man1/ps.html deleted file mode 100644 index bf19c676..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ps.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - -ps(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PS(1)PS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ps, psu – process status
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ps [ −pa ] -
- - psu [ −pa ] [ user ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ps prints information about processes. Psu prints only information - about processes started by user (default $USER). -
- - For each process reported, the user, process id, user time, system - time, size, state, and command name are printed. State is one - of the following:
- Moribund   Process has exited and is about to have its resources - reclaimed.
- Ready      on the queue of processes ready to be run.
- Scheding   about to be run.
- Running    running.
- Queueing   waiting on a queue for a resource.
- Wakeme     waiting for I/O or some other kernel event to wake it up.
- Broken     dead of unnatural causes; lingering so that it can be examined.
- Stopped    stopped.
- Stopwait   waiting for another process to stop.
- Fault      servicing a page fault.
- Idle       waiting for something to do (kernel processes only).
- New        being created.
- Pageout    paging out some other process.
- Syscall      performing the named system call.
- no resource   waiting for more of a critical resource.
- wchan       waiting on the named wait channel (on a Unix kernel). -
- - With the −p flag, ps also prints, after the system time, the baseline - and current priorities of each process. -
- - The −a flag causes ps to print the arguments for the process. - Newlines in arguments will be translated to spaces for display.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/ps
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/psu
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acid(1), db(1), kill(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/psfonts.html b/man/man1/psfonts.html deleted file mode 100644 index b0510a81..00000000 --- a/man/man1/psfonts.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ - -psfonts(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PSFONTS(1)PSFONTS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - psfonts, psdownload – add necessary fonts to PostScript document - for printing
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - psfonts [ files ... ] -
- - psdownload [ options ] [ files ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plan 9’s troff(1) and tr2post(1) use non-standard PostScript fonts - (found in /usr/local/plan9/postscript/font). Before sending PostScript - output from tr2post to a standard printer, code implementing the - non-standard fonts must be added to the PostScript. -
- - Psfonts copies files (or standard input) to standard output, adding - necessary PostScript fonts. -
- - Psdownload is the more general program used to implement psfonts. - The options are:
- −c comment
- -
- - Expect the fonts used in the document to be listed in a comment - beginning with this string (default %%DocumentFonts:).
- -
- −f atend
- -
- - Expect extra fonts comments at the end of the document, so read - the entire input before starting output (by default this only - happens if a %%DocumentFonts: (atend) comment is encountered).
- -
- −m mapfile
- -
- - Use mapfile to translate from PostScript font names to files. - Each line in the map has two white space-separated fields: a font - name and the corresponding file. If mapfile is not a rooted path, - it is evaluated relative to the fontdir (see −H below).
- -
- −p printer
- -
- - Set the name of the printer. This option is deprecated. Its only - effect is to override the −r option, causing fontdir/printers/printer - to be used as the resident fonts list.
- -
- −r residentfonts
- -
- - Read a list of fonts assumed to be on the printer (not necessary - to re-download) from the file residentfonts. If residentfonts - is not a rooted path, it is evaluated relative to the fontdir - (see −H below).
- -
- −H fontdir
- -
- - Set the directory that is assumed to contain the PostScript fonts - and information about printers (see −m, −p, and −r above; default - /usr/local/plan9/postscript/font).
- -
- −T tmpdir
- -
- - Use tmpdir for storing temporary files (default /var/tmp).
- -
- −D    Produce copious amounts of debugging information on standard - error.
- −I    Continue running even after fatal errors occur.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - See tr2post(1) for an example.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/psfonts
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/postscript/download
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), tr2post(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/pwd.html b/man/man1/pwd.html deleted file mode 100644 index ab8b8c3d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/pwd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ - -pwd(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PWD(1)PWD(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pwd, pbd – working directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - pwd
- pbd
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pwd prints the path name of the working (current) directory. -
- - Pbd prints the base name of the working (current) directory. It - prints no final newline and is intended for applications such - as constructing shell prompts.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/pbd.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cd in rc(1), getwd(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Pwd is not provided. Unix already provides one.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/rc.html b/man/man1/rc.html deleted file mode 100644 index a599adfd..00000000 --- a/man/man1/rc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,655 +0,0 @@ - -rc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RC(1)RC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rc, cd, eval, exec, exit, flag, rfork, shift, wait, whatis, ., - ~ – command language
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - rc [ −srdiIlxepvV ] [ −c command ] [ file [ arg ... ]]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rc is the Plan 9 shell. It executes command lines read from a - terminal or a file or, with the −c flag, from rc’s argument list.
-

Command Lines
- A command line is a sequence of commands, separated by ampersands - or semicolons (& or ;), terminated by a newline. The commands are - executed in sequence from left to right. Rc does not wait for - a command followed by & to finish executing before starting the - following command. Whenever a command - followed by & is executed, its process id is assigned to the rc - variable $apid. Whenever a command not followed by & exits or is - terminated, the rc variable $status gets the process’s wait message - (see wait(3)); it will be the null string if the command was successful. - -
- - A long command line may be continued on subsequent lines by typing - a backslash (\) followed by a newline. This sequence is treated - as though it were a blank. Backslash is not otherwise a special - character. -
- - A number-sign (#) and any following characters up to (but not - including) the next newline are ignored, except in quotation marks.
-

Simple Commands
- A simple command is a sequence of arguments interspersed with - I/O redirections. If the first argument is the name of an rc function - or of one of rc’s built-in commands, it is executed by rc. Otherwise - if the name starts with a slash (/), it must be the path name - of the program to be executed. Names containing no - initial slash are searched for in a list of directory names stored - in $path. The first executable file of the given name found in - a directory in $path is the program to be executed. To be executable, - the user must have execute permission (see stat(3)) and the file - must be either an executable binary for the current - machine’s CPU type, or a shell script. Shell scripts begin with - a line containing the full path name of a shell (usually /bin/rc), - prefixed by #!. -
- - The first word of a simple command cannot be a keyword unless - it is quoted or otherwise disguised. The keywords are
- -
- - for in while if not switch fn ~ ! @
- -
-

Arguments and Variables
- A number of constructions may be used where rc’s syntax requires - an argument to appear. In many cases a construction’s value will - be a list of arguments rather than a single string. -
- - The simplest kind of argument is the unquoted word: a sequence - of one or more characters none of which is a blank, tab, newline, - or any of the following:
- -
- - # ; & | ^ $ = ` ' { } ( ) < >
- -
- An unquoted word that contains any of the characters * ? [ is - a pattern for matching against file names. The character * matches - any sequence of characters, ? matches any single character, and - [class] matches any character in the class. If the first character - of class is ~, the class is complemented. The class may - also contain pairs of characters separated by −, standing for - all characters lexically between the two. The character / must - appear explicitly in a pattern, as must the first character of - the path name components . and ... A pattern is replaced by a - list of arguments, one for each path name matched, except that - a - pattern matching no names is not replaced by the empty list, but - rather stands for itself. Pattern matching is done after all other - operations. Thus,
- -
- - x=/tmp echo $x^/*.c
- -
- matches /tmp/*.c, rather than matching /*.c and then prefixing - /tmp. -
- - A quoted word is a sequence of characters surrounded by single - quotes ('). A single quote is represented in a quoted word by - a pair of quotes (''). -
- - Each of the following is an argument.
- (arguments)
- -
- - The value of a sequence of arguments enclosed in parentheses is - a list comprising the members of each element of the sequence. - Argument lists have no recursive structure, although their syntax - may suggest it. The following are entirely equivalent:
- -
- - echo hi there everybody
- ((echo) (hi there) everybody)
- -
- -
- $argument
- $argument(subscript)
- -
- - The argument after the $ is the name of a variable whose value - is substituted. Multiple levels of indirection are possible, but - of questionable utility. Variable values are lists of strings. - If argument is a number n, the value is the nth element of $*, - unless $* doesn’t have n elements, in which case the value is - empty. If argument is followed by a parenthesized list of subscripts, - the value substituted is a list composed of the requested elements - (origin 1). The parenthesis must follow the variable name with - no spaces. Assignments to variables are described below.
- -
- $#argument
- -
- - The value is the number of elements in the named variable. A variable - never assigned a value has zero elements.
- -
- $"argument
- -
- - The value is a single string containing the components of the - named variable separated by spaces. A variable with zero elements - yields the empty string.
- -
- `{command}
- -
- - rc executes the command and reads its standard output, splitting - it into a list of arguments, using characters in $ifs as separators. - If $ifs is not otherwise set, its value is ' \t\n'.
- -
- <{command}
- >{command}
- -
- - The command is executed asynchronously with its standard output - or standard input connected to a pipe. The value of the argument - is the name of a file referring to the other end of the pipe. - This allows the construction of non-linear pipelines. For example, - the following runs two commands old and new - and uses cmp to compare their outputs
- -
- - cmp <{old} <{new}
- -
- -
- argument^argument
- -
- - The ^ operator concatenates its two operands. If the two operands - have the same number of components, they are concatenated pairwise. - If not, then one operand must have one component, and the other - must be non-empty, and concatenation is distributive.
- -
-

Free Carets
- In most circumstances, rc will insert the ^ operator automatically - between words that are not separated by white space. Whenever - one of $ ' ` follows a quoted or unquoted word or an unquoted - word follows a quoted word with no intervening blanks or tabs, - a ^ is inserted between the two. If an unquoted word - immediately follows a $ and contains a character other than an - alphanumeric, underscore, or *, a ^ is inserted before the first - such character. Thus
- -
- - cc −$flags $stem.c -
- - -
- is equivalent to
- -
- - cc −^$flags $stem^.c
- -
-

I/O Redirections
- The sequence >file redirects the standard output file (file descriptor - 1, normally the terminal) to the named file; >>file appends standard - output to the file. The standard input file (file descriptor 0, - also normally the terminal) may be redirected from a file by the - sequence <file, or from an inline ‘here document’ by the - sequence <<eof-marker. The contents of a here document are lines - of text taken from the command input stream up to a line containing - nothing but the eof-marker, which may be either a quoted or unquoted - word. If eof-marker is unquoted, variable names of the form $word - have their values substituted from rc’s - environment. If $word is followed by a caret (^), the caret is - deleted. If eof-marker is quoted, no substitution occurs. -
- - Redirections may be applied to a file-descriptor other than standard - input or output by qualifying the redirection operator with a - number in square brackets. For example, the diagnostic output - (file descriptor 2) may be redirected by writing cc junk.c >[2]junk. - -
- - A file descriptor may be redirected to an already open descriptor - by writing >[fd0=fd1] or <[fd0=fd1]. Fd1 is a previously opened - file descriptor and fd0 becomes a new copy (in the sense of dup(3)) - of it. A file descriptor may be closed by writing >[fd0=] or <[fd0=]. - -
- - Redirections are executed from left to right. Therefore, cc junk.c - >/dev/null >[2=1] and cc junk.c >[2=1] >/dev/null have different effects: - the first puts standard output in /dev/null and then puts diagnostic - output in the same place, where the second directs diagnostic - output to the - terminal and sends standard output to /dev/null.
-

Compound Commands
- A pair of commands separated by a pipe operator (|) is a command. - The standard output of the left command is sent through a pipe - to the standard input of the right command. The pipe operator - may be decorated to use different file descriptors. |[fd] connects - the output end of the pipe to file descriptor fd rather - than 1. |[fd0=fd1] connects output to fd1 of the left command - and input to fd0 of the right command. -
- - A pair of commands separated by && or || is a command. In either - case, the left command is executed and its exit status examined. - If the operator is && the right command is executed if the left - command’s status is null. || causes the right command to be executed - if the left command’s status is non-null. -
- - The exit status of a command may be inverted (non-null is changed - to null, null is changed to non-null) by preceding it with a !. - -
- - The | operator has highest precedence, and is left-associative - (i.e. binds tighter to the left than the right). ! has intermediate - precedence, and && and || have the lowest precedence. -
- - The unary @ operator, with precedence equal to !, causes its operand - to be executed in a subshell. -
- - Each of the following is a command.
- if ( list ) command
- -
- - A list is a sequence of commands, separated by &, ;, or newline. - It is executed and if its exit status is null, the command is - executed.
- -
- if not command
- -
- - The immediately preceding command must have been if(list) command. - If its condition was non-zero, the command is executed.
- -
- for(name in arguments) command
- for(name) command
- -
- - The command is executed once for each argument with that argument - assigned to name. If the argument list is omitted, $* is used.
- -
- while(list) command
- -
- - The list is executed repeatedly until its exit status is non-null. - Each time it returns null status, the command is executed. An - empty list is taken to give null status.
- -
- switch(argument){list}
- -
- - The list is searched for simple commands beginning with the word - case. (The search is only at the ‘top level’ of the list. That - is, cases in nested constructs are not found.) Argument is matched - against each word following case using the pattern-matching algorithm - described above, except that / and the - first characters of . and .. need not be matched explicitly. When - a match is found, commands in the list are executed up to the - next following case command (at the top level) or the closing - brace.
- -
- {list}
- -
- - Braces serve to alter the grouping of commands implied by operator - priorities. The body is a sequence of commands separated by &, - ;, or newline.
- -
- fn name{list}
- fn name
- -
- - The first form defines a function with the given name. Subsequently, - whenever a command whose first argument is name is encountered, - the current value of the remainder of the command’s argument list - will be assigned to $*, after saving its current value, and rc - will execute the list. The second form removes - name’s function definition.
- -
- fn note{list}
- fn note
- -
- - A function with a special name will be called when rc receives - a corresponding note; see notify(3). The valid note names (and - corresponding notes) are sighup (hangup), sigint (interrupt), - sigalrm (alarm), and sigfpe (floating point trap). By default - rc exits on receiving any signal, except when - run interactively, in which case interrupts and quits normally - cause rc to stop whatever it’s doing and start reading a new command. - The second form causes rc to handle a signal in the default manner. - Rc recognizes an artificial note, sigexit, which occurs when rc - is about to finish executing. - -
- name=argument command
- -
- - Any command may be preceded by a sequence of assignments interspersed - with redirections. The assignments remain in effect until the - end of the command, unless the command is empty (i.e. the assignments - stand alone), in which case they are effective until rescinded - by later assignments. - -
-

Built-in Commands
- These commands are executed internally by rc, usually because - their execution changes or depends on rc’s internal state.
- . file ...
- -
- - Execute commands from file. $* is set for the duration to the - remainder of the argument list following file. File is searched - for using $path.
- -
- builtin command ...
- -
- - Execute command as usual except that any function named command - is ignored in favor of the built-in meaning.
- -
- cd [dir]
- -
- - Change the current directory to dir. The default argument is $home. - dir is searched for in each of the directories mentioned in $cdpath.
- -
- eval [arg ...]
- -
- - The arguments are concatenated separated by spaces into a single - string, read as input to rc, and executed.
- -
- exec [command ...]
- -
- - This instance of rc replaces itself with the given (non-built-in) - command.
- -
- flag f [+−]
- -
- - Either set (+), clear (−), or test (neither + nor −) the flag - f, where f is a single character, one of the command line flags - (see Invocation, below).
- -
- exit [status]
- -
- - Exit with the given exit status. If none is given, the current - value of $status is used.
- -
- rfork [nNeEsfFm]
- -
- - Become a new process group using rfork(flags) where flags is composed - of the bitwise OR of the rfork flags specified by the option letters - (see fork(2)). If no flags are given, they default to ens. The - flags and their meanings are: n is RFNAMEG; N is RFCNAMEG; e is - RFENVG; E is RFCENVG; s is - RFNOTEG; f is RFFDG; F is RFCFDG; and m is RFNOMNT.
- -
- shift [n]
- -
- - Delete the first n (default 1) elements of $*.
- -
- wait [pid]
- -
- - Wait for the process with the given pid to exit. If no pid is - given, all outstanding processes are waited for.
- -
- whatis name ...
- -
- - Print the value of each name in a form suitable for input to rc. - The output is an assignment to any variable, the definition of - any function, a call to builtin for any built-in command, or the - completed pathname of any executable file.
- -
- ~ subject pattern ...
- -
- - The subject is matched against each pattern in sequence. If it - matches any pattern, $status is set to zero. Otherwise, $status - is set to one. Patterns are the same as for file name matching, - except that / and the first character of . and .. need not be - matched explicitly. The patterns are not subjected to - file name matching before the ~ command is executed, so they need - not be enclosed in quotation marks.
- -
-

Environment
- The environment is a list of strings made available to executing - binaries by the kernel. Rc creates an environment entry for each - variable whose value is non-empty, and for each function. The - string for a variable entry has the variable’s name followed by - = and its value. If the value has more than one component, - these are separated by SOH (001) characters. The string for a - function is just the rc input that defines the function. The name - of a function in the environment is the function name preceded - by fn#. -
- - When rc starts executing it reads variable and function definitions - from its environment.
-

Special Variables
- The following variables are set or used by rc.
- $*        Set to rc’s argument list during initialization. Whenever a - . command or a function is executed, the current value is saved - and $* receives the new argument list. The saved value is restored - on completion of the . or function.
- $apid     Whenever a process is started asynchronously with &, $apid - is set to its process id.
- $home     The default directory for cd.
- $ifs      The input field separators used in backquote substitutions. - If $ifs is not set in rc’s environment, it is initialized to blank, - tab and newline.
- $path     The search path used to find commands and input files for - the . command. If not set in the environment, it is initialized - by parsing the $PATH variable (as in sh(1)) or by path=(. /bin). - The variables $path and $PATH are maintained together: changes - to one will be reflected in the other. - $pid      Set during initialization to rc’s process id.
- $prompt   When rc is run interactively, the first component of $prompt - is printed before reading each command. The second component is - printed whenever a newline is typed and more lines are required - to complete the command. If not set in the environment, it is - initialized by prompt=('% ' ' '). - $status   Set to the wait message of the last-executed program. (unless - started with &). ! and ~ also change $status. Its value is used - to control execution in &&, ||, if and while commands. When rc exits - at end-of-file of its input or on executing an exit command with - no argument, $status is its - -
- - -
- - exit status.
- -
- -
-

Invocation
- If rc is started with no arguments it reads commands from standard - input. Otherwise its first non-flag argument is the name of a - file from which to read commands (but see −c below). Subsequent - arguments become the initial value of $*. Rc accepts the following - command-line flags.
- −c string   Commands are read from string.
- −s        Print out exit status after any command where the status is - non-null.
- −e        Exit if $status is non-null after executing a simple command.
- −i        If −i is present, or rc is given no arguments and its standard - input is a terminal, it runs interactively. Commands are prompted - for using $prompt.
- −I        Makes sure rc is not run interactively.
- −l        If −l is given or the first character of argument zero is −, - rc reads commands from $home/lib/profile, if it exists, before - reading its normal input.
- −p        A no-op.
- −d        A no-op.
- −v        Echo input on file descriptor 2 as it is read.
- −x        Print each simple command before executing it.
- −r        Print debugging information (internal form of commands as they - are executed).
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/rc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - Tom Duff, “Rc – The Plan 9 Shell”.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There should be a way to match patterns against whole lists rather - than just single strings. -
- - Using ~ to check the value of $status changes $status. -
- - Functions that use here documents don’t work. -
- - Free carets don’t get inserted next to keywords. -
- - The <{command} syntax depends on the underlying operating system - providing a file descriptor device tree at /dev/fd. -
- - By default, FreeBSD 5 does not provide file descriptors greater - than 2 in /dev/fd. To fix this, add
- -
- - /fdescfs      /dev/fd      fdescfs      rw      0      0
- -
- - -
- to /etc/fstab, and then mount /dev/fd. (Adding the line to fstab - ensures causes FreeBSD to mount the file system automatically - at boot time.)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/rio.html b/man/man1/rio.html deleted file mode 100644 index ad3f9adc..00000000 --- a/man/man1/rio.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ - -rio(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RIO(1)RIO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rio – rio-like Window Manager for X
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - rio [ –font fontname ] [ –grey ] [ –s ] [ –term termprog ] [ –version - ] [ –virtuals num ] [ exit | restart ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rio is a window manager for X which attempts to emulate the window - management policies of Plan 9’s rio window manager. Rio is derived - from David Hogan’s 8½. -
- - The –grey option makes the background stippled grey, the default - X11 background, instead of solid grey, the Plan 9 background. - -
- - The –font option sets the font in rio’s menu to fname, overriding - the default. Unlike the other programs in the Plan 9 ports, rio - expects this font to be an X11 font rather than a Plan 9 font. - -
- - The –term option specifies an alternative program to run when the - New menu item is selected. The default is to try 9term(1) and - then to fall back to xterm(1). The –s option causes rio to add - −s to 9term’s command-line, starting the window in scrolling mode. - -
- - The –version option prints the current version on standard error, - then exits. -
- - The –virtuals option sets the number of virtual screens (the default - is 1, and the maximum is 12). -
- - If the argument exit or restart is given, it is sent to an already-running - rio, causing the extant rio to exit or restart.
-

Using rio
- -
- - One window is current, and is indicated with a dark border and - text; characters typed on the keyboard are available in the /dev/cons - file of the process in the current window. Characters written - on /dev/cons appear asynchronously in the associated window whether - or not the window is current. -
- - Windows are created, deleted and rearranged using the mouse. Clicking - (pressing and releasing) mouse button 1 in a non-current window - makes that window current and brings it in front of any windows - that happen to be overlapping it. When the mouse cursor points - to the background area or is in a window that has - not claimed the mouse for its own use, pressing mouse button 3 - activates a menu of window operations provided by rio. Releasing - button 3 then selects an operation. At this point, a gunsight - or cross cursor indicates that an operation is pending. The button - 3 menu operations are:
- New      Create a window. Press button 3 where one corner of the new - rectangle should appear (cross cursor), and move the mouse, while - holding down button 3, to the diagonally opposite corner. Releasing - button 3 creates the window, and makes it current. Very small - windows may not be created. The new - -
- - -
- - window is created running termprog, by default 9term(1) or, if - 9term is not available, xterm(1).
- -
- -
- Resize   Change the size and location of a window. First click button - 3 in the window to be changed (gunsight cursor). Then sweep out - a window as for the New operation. The window is made current.
- Move     Move a window to another location. After pressing and holding - button 3 over the window to be moved (gunsight cursor), indicate - the new position by dragging the rectangle to the new location. - The window is made current. Windows may be moved partially off-screen.
- Delete   Delete a window. Click in the window to be deleted (gunsight - cursor). Deleting a window causes a hangup note to be sent to - all processes in the window’s process group (see notify(3)).
- Hide     Hide a window. Click in the window to be hidden (gunsight - cursor); it will be moved off-screen. Each hidden window is given - a menu entry in the button 3 menu according to its current window - system label.
- label     Restore a hidden window. -
- - Windows may also be arranged by dragging their borders. Pressing - button 1 or 2 over a window’s border allows one to move the corresponding - edge or corner, while button 3 moves the whole window. -
- - When the mouse cursor points to the background area and rio has - been started with multiple virtual screens using the –virtuals - option, clicking button 2 brings up a menu to select a virtual - screen to view. Scrolling the mouse wheel while the cursor points - at the background will cycle through the virtual screens. - -

-

BUGS
- -
- - In Plan 9’s rio, clicking button 2 or button 3 to select a window - also sends that event to the window itself. This rio does not. - -
- - The command-line syntax is non-standard. -
- - In Plan 9’s rio, newly started applications take over the current - window. This rio starts a new window for each program. (In X11, - it appears to be impossible to know which window starts a particular - program.) -
- - There is a currently a compiled-in limit of 128 hidden windows.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), xterm(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/rm.html b/man/man1/rm.html deleted file mode 100644 index a19b3d3c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/rm.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ - -rm(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RM(1)RM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rm – remove files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - rm [ −fr ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rm removes files or directories. A directory is removed only if - it is empty. Removal of a file requires write permission in its - directory, but neither read nor write permission on the file itself. - The options are
- −f    Don’t report files that can’t be removed.
- −r    Recursively delete the entire contents of a directory and the - directory itself.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/rm.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - remove(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sam.html b/man/man1/sam.html deleted file mode 100644 index c27afa63..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sam.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,577 +0,0 @@ - -sam(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SAM(1)SAM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sam, B, E, sam.save, samterm, samsave – screen editor with structural - regular expressions
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sam [ option ... ] [ files ] -
- - sam −r machine -
- - sam.save -
- - B file[:line] ... -
- - E file
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sam is a multi-file editor. It modifies a local copy of an external - file. The copy is here called a file. The files are listed in - a menu available through mouse button 3 or the n command. Each - file has an associated name, usually the name of the external - file from which it was read, and a ‘modified’ bit that indicates - whether the editor’s file agrees with the external file. The external - file is not read into the editor’s file until it first becomes - the current file--that to which editing commands apply--whereupon - its menu entry is printed. The options are
- −d          Do not ‘download’ the terminal part of sam. Editing will be - done with the command language only, as in ed(1).
- −r machine    Run the host part remotely on the specified machine, - the terminal part locally.
- −s path      Start the host part from the specified file on the remote - host. Only meaningful with the −r option.
- −t path      Start the terminal part from the specified file. Useful - for debugging.
-

Regular expressions
- Regular expressions are as in regexp(7) with the addition of \n - to represent newlines. A regular expression may never contain - a literal newline character. The empty regular expression stands - for the last complete expression encountered. A regular expression - in sam matches the longest leftmost substring formally - matched by the expression. Searching in the reverse direction - is equivalent to searching backwards with the catenation operations - reversed in the expression.
-

Addresses
- An address identifies a substring in a file. In the following, - ‘character n’ means the null string after the n-th character in - the file, with 1 the first character in the file. ‘Line n’ means - the n-th match, starting at the beginning of the file, of the - regular expression .*\n?. All files always have a current substring, - called - dot, that is the default address.
-

Simple Addresses
- #n    The empty string after character n; #0 is the beginning of the - file.
- n     Line n; 0 is the beginning of the file.
- /regexp/
- ?regexp?
- -
- - The substring that matches the regular expression, found by looking - toward the end (/) or beginning (?) of the file, and if necessary - continuing the search from the other end to the starting point - of the search. The matched substring may straddle the starting - point. When entering a pattern containing a literal - question mark for a backward search, the question mark should - be specified as a member of a class.
- -
- 0     The string before the first full line. This is not necessarily - the null string; see + and − below.
- $     The null string at the end of the file.
- .     Dot.
- '     The mark in the file (see the k command below).
- "regexp"
- -
- - Preceding a simple address (default .), refers to the address - evaluated in the unique file whose menu line matches the regular - expression.
- -
-

Compound Addresses
- In the following, a1 and a2 are addresses.
- a1+a2   The address a2 evaluated starting at the end of a1.
- a1−a2   The address a2 evaluated looking in the reverse direction - starting at the beginning of a1.
- a1,a2   The substring from the beginning of a1 to the end of a2. - If a1 is missing, 0 is substituted. If a2 is missing, $ is substituted.
- a1;a2   Like a1,a2, but with a2 evaluated at the end of, and dot - set to, a1. -
- - The operators + and − are high precedence, while , and ; are low - precedence. -
- - In both + and − forms, if a2 is a line or character address with - a missing number, the number defaults to 1. If a1 is missing, - . is substituted. If both a1 and a2 are present and distinguishable, - + may be elided. a2 may be a regular expression; if it is delimited - by ?’s, the effect of the + or − is reversed. -
- - It is an error for a compound address to represent a malformed - substring. Some useful idioms: a1+− (a1-+) selects the line containing - the end (beginning) of a1. 0/regexp/ locates the first match of - the expression in the file. (The form 0;// sets dot unnecessarily.) - ./regexp/// finds the second following - occurrence of the expression, and .,/regexp/ extends dot.
-

Commands
- In the following, text demarcated by slashes represents text delimited - by any printable character except alphanumerics. Any number of - trailing delimiters may be elided, with multiple elisions then - representing null strings, but the first delimiter must always - be present. In any delimited text, newline may not appear - literally; \n may be typed for newline; and \/ quotes the delimiter, - here /. Backslash is otherwise interpreted literally, except in - s commands. -
- - Most commands may be prefixed by an address to indicate their - range of operation. Those that may not are marked with a * below. - If a command takes an address and none is supplied, dot is used. - The sole exception is the w command, which defaults to 0,$. In - the description, ‘range’ is used to represent whatever - address is supplied. Many commands set the value of dot as a side - effect. If so, it is always set to the ‘result’ of the change: - the empty string for a deletion, the new text for an insertion, - etc. (but see the s and e commands).
-

Text commands
- a/text/
- or
- a
- lines of text
- .     Insert the text into the file after the range. Set dot.
- c
- i     Same as a, but c replaces the text, while i inserts before the - range.
- d     Delete the text in the range. Set dot.
- s/regexp/text/
- -
- - Substitute text for the first match to the regular expression - in the range. Set dot to the modified range. In text the character - & stands for the string that matched the expression. Backslash - behaves as usual unless followed by a digit: \d stands for the - string that matched the subexpression begun by the d-th left - parenthesis. If s is followed immediately by a number n, as in - s2/x/y/, the n-th match in the range is substituted. If the command - is followed by a g, as in s/x/y/g, all matches in the range are - substituted.
- -
- m a1
- t a1   Move (m) or copy (t) the range to after a1. Set dot.
-

Display commands
- p     Print the text in the range. Set dot.
- =     Print the line address and character address of the range.
- =#    Print just the character address of the range.
-

File commands
- * b file-list
- -
- - Set the current file to the first file named in the list that - sam also has in its menu. The list may be expressed <Plan 9 command - in which case the file names are taken as words (in the shell - sense) generated by the Plan 9 command.
- -
- * B file-list
- -
- - Same as b, except that file names not in the menu are entered - there, and all file names in the list are examined.
- -
- * n    Print a menu of files. The format is:
- -
- - ' or blankindicating the file is modified or clean,
- − or +    indicating the file is unread or has been read (in the terminal, - * means more than one window is open),
- . or blankindicating the current file,
- a blank,
- and the file name.
- -
- * D file-list
- -
- - Delete the named files from the menu. If no files are named, the - current file is deleted. It is an error to D a modified file, - but a subsequent D will delete such a file.
- -
-

I/O Commands
- * e filename
- -
- - Replace the file by the contents of the named external file. Set - dot to the beginning of the file.
- -
- r filename
- -
- - Replace the text in the range by the contents of the named external - file. Set dot.
- -
- w filename
- -
- - Write the range (default 0,$) to the named external file.
- -
- * f filename
- -
- - Set the file name and print the resulting menu entry. -
- - -
- If the file name is absent from any of these, the current file - name is used. e always sets the file name; r and w do so if the - file has no name.
- < Plan 9-command
- -
- - Replace the range by the standard output of the Plan 9 command.
- -
- > Plan 9-command
- -
- - Send the range to the standard input of the Plan 9 command.
- -
- | Plan 9-command
- -
- - Send the range to the standard input, and replace it by the standard - output, of the Plan 9 command.
- -
- * ! Plan 9-command
- -
- - Run the Plan 9 command.
- -
- * cd directory
- -
- - Change working directory. If no directory is specified, $home - is used. -
- - -
- In any of <, >, | or !, if the Plan 9 command is omitted the last - Plan 9 command (of any type) is substituted. If sam is downloaded - (using the mouse and raster display, i.e. not using option −d), - ! sets standard input to /dev/null, and otherwise unassigned output - (stdout for ! and >, stderr for all) is placed in - /tmp/sam.err and the first few lines are printed.
-

Loops and Conditionals
- x/regexp/ command
- -
- - For each match of the regular expression in the range, run the - command with dot set to the match. Set dot to the last match. - If the regular expression and its slashes are omitted, /.*\n/ - is assumed. Null string matches potentially occur before every - character of the range and at the end of the range. - -
- y/regexp/ command
- -
- - Like x, but run the command for each substring that lies before, - between, or after the matches that would be generated by x. There - is no default regular expression. Null substrings potentially - occur before every character in the range.
- -
- * X/regexp/ command
- -
- - For each file whose menu entry matches the regular expression, - make that the current file and run the command. If the expression - is omitted, the command is run in every file.
- -
- * Y/regexp/ command
- -
- - Same as X, but for files that do not match the regular expression, - and the expression is required.
- -
- g/regexp/ command
- v/regexp/ command
- -
- - If the range contains (g) or does not contain (v) a match for - the expression, set dot to the range and run the command. -
- - -
- These may be nested arbitrarily deeply, but only one instance - of either X or Y may appear in a single command. An empty command - in an x or y defaults to p; an empty command in X or Y defaults - to f. g and v do not have defaults.
-

Miscellany
- k         Set the current file’s mark to the range. Does not set dot.
- * q        Quit. It is an error to quit with modified files, but a second - q will succeed.
- * u n      Undo the last n (default 1) top-level commands that changed - the contents or name of the current file, and any other file whose - most recent change was simultaneous with the current file’s change. - Successive u’s move further back in time. The only commands for - which u is ineffective are cd, u, q, w and - -
- - -
- - D. If n is negative, u ‘redoes,’ undoing the undo, going forwards - in time again.
- -
- -
- (empty)    If the range is explicit, set dot to the range. If sam - is downloaded, the resulting dot is selected on the screen; otherwise - it is printed. If no address is specified (the command is a newline) - dot is extended in either direction to line boundaries and printed. - If dot is thereby unchanged, it is set to .+1 and - -
- - -
- - printed.
- -
- -
-

Grouping and multiple changes
- Commands may be grouped by enclosing them in braces {}. Commands - within the braces must appear on separate lines (no backslashes - are required between commands). Semantically, an opening brace - is like a command: it takes an (optional) address and sets dot - for each sub-command. Commands within the - braces are executed sequentially, but changes made by one command - are not visible to other commands (see the next paragraph). Braces - may be nested arbitrarily. -
- - When a command makes a number of changes to a file, as in x/re/c/text/, - the addresses of all changes to the file are computed in the original - file. If the changes are in sequence, they are applied to the - file. Successive insertions at the same address are catenated - into a single insertion composed of the several - insertions in the order applied.
-

The terminal
- What follows refers to behavior of sam when downloaded, that is, - when operating as a display editor on a raster display. This is - the default behavior; invoking sam with the −d (no download) option - provides access to the command language only. -
- - Each file may have zero or more windows open. Each window is equivalent - and is updated simultaneously with changes in other windows on - the same file. Each window has an independent value of dot, indicated - by a highlighted substring on the display. Dot may be in a region - not within the window. There is usually - a ‘current window’, marked with a dark border, to which typed - text and editing commands apply. Text may be typed and edited - as in rio(1); also the escape key (ESC) selects (sets dot to) - text typed since the last mouse button hit. -
- - The button 3 menu controls window operations. The top of the menu - provides the following operators, each of which uses one or more - rio-like cursors to prompt for selection of a window or sweeping - of a rectangle. ‘Sweeping’ a null rectangle gets a large window, - disjoint from the command window or the whole - screen, depending on where the null rectangle is.
- new      Create a new, empty file.
- zerox    Create a copy of an existing window.
- resize   As in rio.
- close    Delete the window. In the last window of a file, close is - equivalent to a D for the file.
- write    Equivalent to a w for the file. -
- - Below these operators is a list of available files, starting with - ~~sam~~, the command window. Selecting a file from the list makes - the most recently used window on that file current, unless it - is already current, in which case selections cycle through the - open windows. If no windows are open on the file, the user is - prompted to open one. Files other than ~~sam~~ are marked with - one of the characters −+* according as zero, one, or more windows - are open on the file. A further mark . appears on the file in - the current window and a single quote, ', on a file modified since - last write. -
- - The command window, created automatically when sam starts, is - an ordinary window except that text typed to it is interpreted - as commands for the editor rather than passive text, and text - printed by editor commands appears in it. The behavior is like - rio, with an ‘output point’ that separates commands being typed - from previous output. Commands typed in the command window apply - to the current open file--the file in the most recently current - window.
-

Manipulating text
- Button 1 changes selection, much like rio. Pointing to a non-current - window with button 1 makes it current; within the current window, - button 1 selects text, thus setting dot. Double-clicking selects - text to the boundaries of words, lines, quoted strings or bracketed - strings, depending on the text at the click. -
- - Button 2 provides a menu of editing commands:
- cut       Delete dot and save the deleted text in the snarf buffer.
- paste     Replace the text in dot by the contents of the snarf buffer.
- snarf     Save the text in dot in the snarf buffer.
- plumb     Send the text in the selection as a plumb message. If the - selection is empty, the white-space-delimited block of text is - sent as a plumb message with a click attribute defining where - the selection lies (see plumb(7)).
- look      Search forward for the next occurrence of the literal text - in dot. If dot is the null string, the text in the snarf buffer - is used. The snarf buffer is unaffected.
- <rio>     Exchange snarf buffers with rio.
- /regexp    Search forward for the next match of the last regular expression - typed in a command. (Not in command window.)
- send      Send the text in dot, or the snarf buffer if dot is the null - string, as if it were typed to the command window. Saves the sent - text in the snarf buffer. (Command window only.)
-

External communication
- Sam listens to the edit plumb port. If plumbing is not active, - on invocation sam creates a named pipe /srv/sam.user which acts - as an additional source of commands. Characters written to the - named pipe are treated as if they had been typed in the command - window. -
- - B is a shell-level command that causes an instance of sam running - on the same terminal to load the named files. B uses either plumbing - or the named pipe, whichever service is available. If plumbing - is not enabled, the option allows a line number to be specified - for the initial position to display in the last named file - (plumbing provides a more general mechanism for this ability). - -
- - E is a shell-level command that can be used as $EDITOR in a Unix - environment. It runs B on file and then does not exit until file - is changed, which is taken as a signal that file is done being - edited.
-

Abnormal termination
- If sam terminates other than by a q command (by hangup, deleting - its window, etc.), modified files are saved in an executable file, - $HOME/sam.save. This program, when executed, asks whether to write - each file back to a external file. The answer y causes writing; - anything else skips the file. - -

-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/sam.save
- $HOME/sam.err
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/samsave
- -
- - -
- - the program called to unpack $HOME/sam.save.
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sam       source for sam itself
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/samterm   source for the separate terminal - part
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/B
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/E
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ed(1), sed(1), grep(1), rio(1), regexp(7). -
- - Rob Pike, “The text editor sam”.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/scat.html b/man/man1/scat.html deleted file mode 100644 index d5cf2007..00000000 --- a/man/man1/scat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,385 +0,0 @@ - -scat(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SCAT(1)SCAT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - scat – sky catalogue and Digitized Sky Survey
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - scat
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Scat looks up items in catalogues of objects outside the solar - system and implements database-like manipulations on sets of such - objects. It also provides an interface to astro(1) to plot the - locations of solar system objects. Finally, it displays images - from the Space Telescope Science Institute’s Digitized Sky Survey, - keyed to the catalogues. -
- - Items are read, one per line, from the standard input and looked - up in the catalogs. Input is case-insensitive. The result of the - lookup becomes the set of objects available to the database commands. - After each lookup or command, if more than two objects are in - the set, scat prints how many objects are in the set; - otherwise it prints the objects’ descriptions or cross-index listings - (suitable for input to scat). An item is in one of the following - formats:
- ngc1234
- -
- - Number 1234 in the New General Catalogue of Nonstellar Objects, - NGC2000.0. The output identifies the type (Gx=galaxy, Pl=planetary - nebula, OC=open cluster, Gb=globular cluster, Nb=bright nebula, - C+N=cluster associated with nebulosity, Ast=asterism, Kt=knot - or nebulous region in a galaxy, - ***=triple star, D*=double star, ?=uncertain, −=nonexistent, PD=plate - defect, and (blank)=unverified or unknown), its position in 2000.0 - coordinates, its size in minutes of arc, a brief description, - and popular names.
- -
- ic1234
- -
- - Like NGC references, but from the Index Catalog.
- -
- sao12345
- -
- - Number 12345 in the Smithsonian Astrophysical Star Catalogue. - Output identifies the visual and photographic magnitudes, 2000.0 - coordinates, proper motion, spectral type, multiplicity and variability - class, and HD number.
- -
- m4    Catalog number 4 in Messier’s catalog. The output is the NGC - number.
- abell1701
- -
- - Catalog number 1701 in the Abell and Zwicky catalog of clusters - of galaxies. Output identifies the magnitude of the tenth brightest - member of the cluster, radius of the cluster in degrees, its distance - in megaparsecs, 2000.0 coordinates, galactic latitude and longitude, - magnitude range of the cluster (the - ‘distance group’), number of members (the ‘richness group’), population - per square degree, and popular names.
- -
- planetarynebula
- -
- - The set of NGC objects of the specified type. The type may be - a compact NGC code or a full name, as above, with no blank.
- -
- "α umi"
- -
- - Names are provided in double quotes. Known names are the Greek - letter designations, proper names such as Betelgeuse, bright variable - stars, and some proper names of stars, NGC objects, and Abell - clusters. Greek letters may be spelled out, e.g. alpha. Constellation - names must be the three-letter - abbreviations. The output is the SAO number. For non-Greek names, - catalog numbers and names are listed for all objects with names - for which the given name is a prefix.
- -
- 12h34m −16
- -
- - Coordinates in the sky are translated to the nearest ‘patch’, - approximately one square degree of sky. The output is the coordinates - identifying the patch, the constellations touching the patch, - and the Abell, NGC, and SAO objects in the patch. The program - prints sky positions in several formats corresponding to - different precisions; any output format is understood as input.
- -
- umi   All the patches in the named constellation.
- marsThe planets are identified by their names. The names shadow - and comet refer to the earth’s penumbra at lunar distance and - the comet installed in the current astro(1). The output is the - planet’s name, right ascension and declination, azimuth and altitude, - and phase for the moon and sun, as shown by - -
- - astro. The positions are current at the start of scat’s execution; - see the astro command in the next section for more information. - -
- - -
- The commands are:
- add itemAdd the named item to the set.
- keep class ...
- -
- - -
- - Flatten the set and cull it, keeping only the specified classes. - The classes may be specific NGC types, all stars (sao), all NGC - objects (ngc), all M objects (m), all Abell clusters (abell), - or a specified brightness range. Brightness ranges are specified - by a leading > or < followed by a magnitude. Remember - that brighter objects have lesser magnitudes.
- -
- -
- drop class ...
- -
- - -
- - Complement to keep.
- -
- -
- flat    Some items such as patches represents sets of items. Flat - flattens the set so scat holds all the information available for - the objects in the set.
- print   Print the contents of the set. If the information seems meager, - try flattening the set.
- expand n
- -
- - -
- - Flatten the set, expand the area of the sky covered by the set - to be n degrees wider, and collect all the objects in that area. - If n is zero, expand collects all objects in the patches that - cover the current set.
- -
- -
- astro option
- -
- - -
- - Run astro(1) with the specified options (to which will be appended - −p), to discover the positions of the planets. Astro’s −d and - −l options can be used to set the time and place; by default, - it’s right now at the coordinates in /lib/sky/here. Running astro - does not change the positions of planets - already in the display set, so astro may be run multiple times, - executing e.g. add mars each time, to plot a series of planetary - positions.
- -
- -
- plot option
- -
- - -
- - Expand and plot the set in a new window on the screen. Symbols - for NGC objects are as in Sky Atlas 2000.0, except that open clusters - are shown as stippled disks rather than circles. Abell clusters - are plotted as a triangle of ellipses. The planets are drawn as - disks of representative color with the first letter - of the name in the disk (lower case for inferior planets; upper - case for superior); the sun, moon, and earth’s shadow are unlabeled - disks. Objects larger than a few pixels are plotted to scale; - however, scat does not have the information necessary to show - the correct orientation for galaxies. - The option nogrid suppresses the lines of declination and right - ascension. By default, scat labels NGC objects, Abell clusters, - and bright stars; option nolabel suppresses these while alllabel - labels stars with their SAO number as well. The default size is - 512x512; options dx n and dy n set the x and - y extent. The option zenithup orients the map so it appears as - it would in the sky at the time and location used by the astro - command (q.v.).
- The output is designed to look best on an LCD display. CRTs have - trouble with the thin, grey lines and dim stars. The option nogrey - uses white instead of grey for these details, improving visibility - at the cost of legibility when plotting on CRTs.
- -
- -
- plate [[ra dec] rasize [decsize]]
- -
- - -
- - Display the section of the Digitized Sky Survey (plate scale approximately - 1.7 arcseconds per pixel) centered on the given right ascension - and declination or, if no position is specified, the current set - of objects. The maximum area that will be displayed is one degree - on a side. The horizontal and vertical sizes - may be specified in the usual notation for angles. If the second - size is omitted, a square region is displayed. If no size is specified, - the size is sufficient to display the centers of all the objects - in the current set. If a single object is in the set, the 500x500 - pixel block from the survey containing the center of - the object is displayed. The survey is stored in the CD-ROM juke - box; run 9fs juke before running scat.
- -
- -
- gamma value
- -
- - -
- - Set the gamma for converting plates to images. Default is –1.0. - Negative values display white stars, positive black. The images - look best on displays with depth 8 or greater. Scat does not change - the hardware color map, which should be set externally to a grey - scale; try the command getmap gamma (see - getmap(9.1)) on an 8-bit color-mapped display.
- -
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Plot the Messier objects and naked-eye stars in Orion.
- -
- - ori
- keep m <6
- plot nogrid
- -
- - -
- Draw a finder chart for Uranus:
- -
- - uranus
- expand 5
- plot
- -
- - -
- Show a partial lunar eclipse:
- -
- - astro −d
- 2000 07 16 12 45
- moon
- add shadow
- expand 2
- plot
- -
- - -
- Draw a map of the Pleiades.
- -
- - "alcyone"
- expand 1
- plot
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/sky/*.scat
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/scat
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - astro(1)
- /usr/local/plan9/sky/constelnames the three-letter abbreviations - of the constellation names. -
- - The data was provided by the Astronomical Data Center at the NASA - Goddard Space Flight Center, except for NGC2000.0, which is Copyright - © 1988, Sky Publishing Corporation, used (but not distributed) - by permission. The Digitized Sky Survey, 102 CD-ROMs, is not distributed - with the system. - -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/secstore.html b/man/man1/secstore.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1b9a3a89..00000000 --- a/man/man1/secstore.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,145 +0,0 @@ - -secstore(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SECSTORE(1)SECSTORE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - aescbc, secstore, ipso – secstore commands
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - secstore [ −s server ] [ −(g|G) getfile ] [ −p putfile ] [ −r - rmfile ] [ −c ] [ −u user ] [ −v ] [ −i ] -
- - aescbc -e <cleartext >ciphertext
- aescbc -d <ciphertext >cleartext -
- - ipso [ −a −e −l −f −s ] [ file ... ] -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Secstore authenticates to the server using a password and optionally - a hardware token, then saves or retrieves a file. This is intended - to be a credentials store (public/private keypairs, passwords, - and other secrets) for a factotum. -
- - Option −p stores a file on the secstore. -
- - Option −g retrieves a file to the local directory; option −G writes - it to standard output instead. Specifying getfile of . will send - to standard output a list of remote files with dates, lengths - and SHA1 hashes. -
- - Option −r removes a file from the secstore. -
- - Option −c prompts for a password change. -
- - Option −v produces more verbose output, in particular providing - a few bits of feedback to help the user detect mistyping. -
- - Option −i says that the password should be read from standard - input instead of from /dev/cons. -
- - Option −n says that the password should be read from NVRAM instead - of from /dev/cons. This option is unsupported. -
- - The server is tcp!$auth!5356, or the server specified by option - −s. -
- - For example, to add a secret to the file read by factotum(4) at - startup, open a new window, type
- -
- - % ramfs −p; cd /tmp
- % auth/secstore −g factotum
- secstore password:
- % echo 'key proto=apop dom=x.com user=ehg !password=hi' >> factotum
- % auth/secstore −p factotum
- secstore password:
- % read −m factotum > /mnt/factotum/ctl
- -
- - -
- and delete the window. The first line creates an ephemeral memory-resident - workspace, invisible to others and automatically removed when - the window is deleted. The next three commands fetch the persistent - copy of the secrets, append a new secret, and save the updated - file back to secstore. The final command - loads the new secret into the running factotum. -
- - Aescbc encrypts and decrypts using AES (Rijndael) in cipher block - chaining (CBC) mode.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/secstore
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - factotum(4), Plan 9’s secstore(8)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is deliberately no backup of files on the secstore, so −r - (or a disk crash) is irrevocable. You are advised to store important - secrets in a second location.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sed.html b/man/man1/sed.html deleted file mode 100644 index c40874ad..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sed.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,300 +0,0 @@ - -sed(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SED(1)SED(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sed – stream editor
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sed [ −n ] [ −g ] [ −e script ] [ −f sfile ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sed copies the named files (standard input default) to the standard - output, edited according to a script of commands. The −f option - causes the script to be taken from file sfile; these options accumulate. - If there is just one −e option and no −f’s, the flag −e may be - omitted. The −n option suppresses the default - output; −g causes all substitutions to be global, as if suffixed - g. -
- - A script consists of editing commands, one per line, of the following - form:
- -
- - [address [, address] ] function [argument ...] -
- - -
- In normal operation sed cyclically copies a line of input into - a pattern space (unless there is something left after a D command), - applies in sequence all commands whose addresses select that pattern - space, and at the end of the script copies the pattern space to - the standard output (except under −n) and deletes the - pattern space. -
- - An address is either a decimal number that counts input lines - cumulatively across files, a $ that addresses the last line of - input, or a context address, /regular-expression/, in the style - of regexp(7), with the added convention that \n matches a newline - embedded in the pattern space. -
- - A command line with no addresses selects every pattern space. - -
- - A command line with one address selects each pattern space that - matches the address. -
- - A command line with two addresses selects the inclusive range - from the first pattern space that matches the first address through - the next pattern space that matches the second. (If the second - address is a number less than or equal to the line number first - selected, only one line is selected.) Thereafter the process is - repeated, looking again for the first address. -
- - Editing commands can be applied to non-selected pattern spaces - by use of the negation function ! (below). -
- - An argument denoted text consists of one or more lines, all but - the last of which end with \ to hide the newline. Backslashes - in text are treated like backslashes in the replacement string - of an s command, and may be used to protect initial blanks and - tabs against the stripping that is done on every script line. - -
- - An argument denoted rfile or wfile must terminate the command - line and must be preceded by exactly one blank. Each wfile is - created before processing begins. There can be at most 120 distinct - wfile arguments.
- a\
- text        Append. Place text on the output before reading the next input - line.
- b label      Branch to the : command bearing the label. If label is - empty, branch to the end of the script.
- c\
- text        Change. Delete the pattern space. With 0 or 1 address or at - the end of a 2-address range, place text on the output. Start - the next cycle.
- d          Delete the pattern space. Start the next cycle.
- D          Delete the initial segment of the pattern space through the first - newline. Start the next cycle.
- g          Replace the contents of the pattern space by the contents of - the hold space.
- G          Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern space.
- h          Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents of the - pattern space.
- H          Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold space.
- i\
- text        Insert. Place text on the standard output.
- n          Copy the pattern space to the standard output. Replace the pattern - space with the next line of input.
- N          Append the next line of input to the pattern space with an embedded - newline. (The current line number changes.)
- p          Print. Copy the pattern space to the standard output.
- P          Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through the first - newline to the standard output.
- q          Quit. Branch to the end of the script. Do not start a new cycle.
- r rfile       Read the contents of rfile. Place them on the output before - reading the next input line.
- s/regular-expression/replacement/flags
- -
- - -
- - Substitute the replacement string for instances of the regular-expression - in the pattern space. Any character may be used instead of /. - For a fuller description see regexp(7). Flags is zero or more - of
- g     Global. Substitute for all non-overlapping instances of the regular - expression rather than just the first one.
- p     Print the pattern space if a replacement was made.
- w wfile
- Write. Append the pattern space to wfile if a replacement was - made.
- -
- -
- t label      Test. Branch to the : command bearing the label if any - substitutions have been made since the most recent reading of - an input line or execution of a t. If label is empty, branch to - the end of the script.
- w          wfile
- -
- - -
- - Write. Append the pattern space to wfile.
- -
- -
- x          Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces.
- y/string1/string2/
- -
- - -
- - Transform. Replace all occurrences of characters in string1 with - the corresponding character in string2. The lengths of string1 - and string2 must be equal.
- -
- -
- !function     Don’t. Apply the function (or group, if function is {) - only to lines not selected by the address(es).
- : label      This command does nothing; it bears a label for b and t - commands to branch to.
- =          Place the current line number on the standard output as a line.
- {          Execute the following commands through a matching } only when - the pattern space is selected.
- -
- - -
- - An empty command is ignored.
- -
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - sed 10q file
- -
- - Print the first 10 lines of the file.
- -
- sed '/^$/d'
- -
- - Delete empty lines from standard input.
- -
- sed 's/UNIX/& system/g'
- -
- - Replace every instance of UNIX by UNIX system. -
- - -
- sed 's/ *$//     drop trailing blanks
- /^$/d                drop empty lines
- s/    */\          replace blanks by newlines
- /g
- /^$/d' chapter*
- -
- - Print the files chapter1, chapter2, etc. one word to a line. -
- - -
- nroff −ms manuscript | sed '
- ${
- -
- - /^$/p -
- -
- -           if last line of file is empty, print it
- -
- }
- //N             if current line is empty, append next line
- /^\n$/D'         if two lines are empty, delete the first
- -
- - Delete all but one of each group of empty lines from a formatted - manuscript.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sed.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ed(1), grep(1), awk(1), lex(1), sam(1), regexp(7)
- L. E. McMahon, ‘SED -- A Non-interactive Text Editor’, Unix Research - System Programmer’s Manual, Volume 2.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - If input is from a pipe, buffering may consume characters beyond - a line on which a q command is executed.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/seq.html b/man/man1/seq.html deleted file mode 100644 index c04a08e5..00000000 --- a/man/man1/seq.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -seq(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SEQ(1)SEQ(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - seq – print sequences of numbers
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - seq [ −w ] [ −fformat ] [ first [ incr ] ] last
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Seq prints a sequence of numbers, one per line, from first (default - 1) to as near last as possible, in increments of incr (default - 1). The loop is:
- -
- - for(val = min; val <= max; val += incr) print val;
- -
- The numbers are interpreted as floating point. -
- - Normally integer values are printed as decimal integers. The options - are
- −fformat    Use the print(3)-style format print for printing each - (floating point) number. The default is %g.
- −w        Equalize the widths of all numbers by padding with leading zeros - as necessary. Not effective with option −f, nor with numbers in - exponential notation.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - seq 0 .05 .1
- -
- - Print 0 0.05 0.1 (on separate lines).
- -
- seq −w 0 .05 .1
- -
- - Print 0.00 0.05 0.10.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/seq.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Option −w always surveys every value in advance. Thus seq −w 1000000000 - is a painful way to get an ‘infinite’ sequence.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sleep.html b/man/man1/sleep.html deleted file mode 100644 index 622bca9a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sleep.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ - -sleep(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SLEEP(1)SLEEP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sleep – suspend execution for an interval
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sleep time
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sleep suspends execution for time seconds.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Execute a command 100 seconds hence.
- -
- - {sleep 100; command}&
- -
- - -
- Repeat a command every 30 seconds.
- -
- - while (){
- -
- - command
- sleep 30
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sleep.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sleep(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sort.html b/man/man1/sort.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2f6de1b7..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sort.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,200 +0,0 @@ - -sort(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SORT(1)SORT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sort – sort and/or merge files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sort [ −cmuMbdfinrwtx ] [ +pos1 [ −pos2 ] ... ] ... [ −k pos1 - [ ,pos2 ] ] ...
- -
- - -
- - ’ [ −o output ] [ −T dir ... ] [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sort sorts lines of all the files together and writes the result - on the standard output. If no input files are named, the standard - input is sorted. -
- - The default sort key is an entire line. Default ordering is lexicographic - by runes. The ordering is affected globally by the following options, - one or more of which may appear.
- −M    Compare as months. The first three non-white space characters - of the field are folded to upper case and compared so that JAN - precedes FEB, etc. Invalid fields compare low to JAN.
- −b    Ignore leading white space (spaces and tabs) in field comparisons.
- −d    ‘Phone directory’ order: only letters, accented letters, digits - and white space are significant in comparisons.
- −f    Fold lower case letters onto upper case. Accented characters - are folded to their non-accented upper case form.
- −i    Ignore characters outside the ASCII range 040-0176 in non-numeric - comparisons.
- −w    Like −i, but ignore only tabs and spaces.
- −n    An initial numeric string, consisting of optional white space, - optional plus or minus sign, and zero or more digits with optional - decimal point, is sorted by arithmetic value.
- −g    Numbers, like −n but with optional e-style exponents, are sorted - by value.
- −r    Reverse the sense of comparisons.
- −tx   ‘Tab character’ separating fields is x. -
- - The notation +pos1 −pos2 restricts a sort key to a field beginning - at pos1 and ending just before pos2. Pos1 and pos2 each have the - form m.n, optionally followed by one or more of the flags Mbdfginr, - where m tells a number of fields to skip from the beginning of - the line and n tells a number of characters to skip - further. If any flags are present they override all the global - ordering options for this key. A missing .n means .0; a missing - −pos2 means the end of the line. Under the −tx option, fields - are strings separated by x; otherwise fields are non-empty strings - separated by white space. White space before a field is part of - the field, except under option −b. A b flag may be attached independently - to pos1 and pos2. -
- - The notation −k pos1[,pos2] is how POSIX sort defines fields: - pos1 and pos2 have the same format but different meanings. The - value of m is origin 1 instead of origin 0 and a missing .n in - pos2 is the end of the field. -
- - When there are multiple sort keys, later keys are compared only - after all earlier keys compare equal. Lines that otherwise compare - equal are ordered with all bytes significant. -
- - These option arguments are also understood:
- −c       Check that the single input file is sorted according to the - ordering rules; give no output unless the file is out of sort.
- −m       Merge; assume the input files are already sorted.
- −u       Suppress all but one in each set of equal lines. Ignored bytes - and bytes outside keys do not participate in this comparison.
- −o       The next argument is the name of an output file to use instead - of the standard output. This file may be the same as one of the - inputs.
- −Tdir     Put temporary files in dir rather than in /var/tmp.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - sort −u +0f +0 list
- -
- - Print in alphabetical order all the unique spellings in a list - of words where capitalized words differ from uncapitalized.
- -
- sort −t: +1 /adm/users
- -
- - Print the users file sorted by user name (the second colon-separated - field).
- -
- sort −umM dates
- -
- - Print the first instance of each month in an already sorted file. - Options −um with just one input file make the choice of a unique - representative from a set of equal lines predictable.
- -
- grep −n '^' input | sort −t: +1f +0n | sed 's/[0−9]*://'
- -
- - A stable sort: input lines that compare equal will come out in - their original order.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /var/tmp/sort.<pid>.<ordinal>
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sort.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - uniq(1), look(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sort comments and exits with non-null status for various trouble - conditions and for disorder discovered under option −c.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - An external null character can be confused with an internally - generated end-of-field character. The result can make a sub-field - not sort less than a longer field. -
- - Some of the options, e.g. −i and −M, are hopelessly provincial.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/spell.html b/man/man1/spell.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9f412d2c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/spell.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ - -spell(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SPELL(1)SPELL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - spell, sprog – find spelling errors
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - spell [ options ] ... [ file ] ... -
- - sprog [ options ] [ −f file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Spell looks up words from the named files (standard input default) - in a spelling list and places possible misspellings--words not sanctioned - there--on the standard output. -
- - Spell ignores constructs of troff(1) and its standard preprocessors. - It understands these options:
- −b    Check British spelling.
- −v    Print all words not literally in the spelling list, with derivations.
- −x    Print, marked with =, every stem as it is looked up in the spelling - list, along with its affix classes. -
- - As a matter of policy, spell does not admit multiple spellings - of the same word. Variants that follow general rules are preferred - over those that don’t, even when the unruly spelling is more common. - Thus, in American usage, ‘modelled’, ‘sizeable’, and ‘judgment’ - are rejected in favor of ‘modeled’, ‘sizable’, and - ‘judgement’. Agglutinated variants are shunned: ‘crewmember’ and - ‘backyard’ cede to ‘crew member’ and ‘back yard’ (noun) or ‘back-yard’ - (adjective).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/amspell
- -
- - American spelling list
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/brspell
- -
- - British spelling list
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/sprog
- -
- - The actual spelling checker. It expects one word per line on standard - input, and takes the same arguments as spell.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/spell       the script
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/spell   source for sprog
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - deroff(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The heuristics of deroff(1) used to excise formatting information - are imperfect. -
- - The spelling list’s coverage is uneven; in particular biology, - medicine, and chemistry, and perforce proper names, not to mention - languages other than English, are covered very lightly.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/split.html b/man/man1/split.html deleted file mode 100644 index ff3a3d38..00000000 --- a/man/man1/split.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ - -split(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SPLIT(1)SPLIT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - split – split a file into pieces
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - split [ option ... ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Split reads file (standard input by default) and writes it in - pieces of 1000 lines per output file. The names of the output - files are xaa, xab, and so on to xzz. The options are
- −n n   Split into n-line pieces.
- −l n   Synonym for −n n, a nod to Unix’s syntax.
- −e expression
- -
- - File divisions occur at each line that matches a regular expression; - see regexp(7). Multiple −e options may appear. If a subexpression - of expression is contained in parentheses (...), the output file - name is the portion of the line which matches the subexpression.
- -
- −f stem
- -
- - Use stem instead of x in output file names.
- -
- −s suffix
- -
- - Append suffix to names identified under −e.
- -
- −x    Exclude the matched input line from the output file.
- −i    Ignore case in option −e; force output file names (excluding - the suffix) to lower case.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/split.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sed(1), awk(1), grep(1), regexp(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/src.html b/man/man1/src.html deleted file mode 100644 index cd8334ec..00000000 --- a/man/man1/src.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -src(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SRC(1)SRC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - src – find source code for executable
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - src [ −n ] [ −s symbol ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Src examines the named files to find the corresponding source - code, which is then sent to the editor using B (see sam(1)). If - file is an rc(1) script, the source is the file itself. If file - is an executable, the source is defined to be the single file - containing the definition of main and src will point the editor - at the line that - begins the definition. Src uses db(1) to extract the symbol table - information that identifies the source. -
- - Src looks for each file in the current directory, in /bin, and - in the subdirectories of /bin, in that order. -
- - The −n flag causes src to print the file name but not send it - to the editor. The −s flag identifies a symbol other than main - to locate.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Find the source to the main routine in /bin/ed:
- -
- - src ed
- -
- - -
- Find the source for strcmp:
- -
- - src −s strcmp rc
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/src
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - db(1), plumb(1), sam(1).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/stats.html b/man/man1/stats.html deleted file mode 100644 index 77b598d5..00000000 --- a/man/man1/stats.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,214 +0,0 @@ - -stats(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STATS(1)STATS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - stats, auxstats – display graphs of system activity
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - stats [ −option ] [ machine[:path] ... ] -
- - auxstats [ machine [ path ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Stats displays a rolling graph of various statistics collected - by the operating system and updated once per second. The statistics - may be from a remote machine or multiple machines, whose graphs - will appear in adjacent columns. The columns are labeled by the - machine names and the number of processors on the - machine if it is a multiprocessor. -
- - Auxstats collects the machine statistics for display by stats. - With no arguments, it collects statistics from the local machine. - If machine is named, it executes ssh machine path; when ssh finishes, - auxstats sleeps for one minute and runs it again. The default - path is simply auxstats, but since some shells do not - execute any sort of user profile when run as a non-login shell, - it is often necessary to specify an exact path. -
- - The right mouse button presents a menu to enable and disable the - display of various statistics; by default, stats begins by showing - the load average on the executing machine. -
- - The lower-case options choose the initial set to display:
- b battery     percentage battery life remaining.
- c context     number of process context switches per second.
- e ether       total number of packets sent and received per second.
- E etherin,out
- -
- - -
- - number of packets sent and received per second, displayed as separate - graphs.
- -
- -
- f fault       number of page faults per second.
- i intr        number of interrupts per second.
- l load        (default) system load average. The load is computed as a - running average of the number of processes ready to run, multiplied - by 1000. On most systems, it changes only every five seconds and - has limited accuracy.
- m mem         total pages of active memory. The graph displays the fraction - of the machine’s total memory in use.
- n etherin,out,err
- -
- - -
- - number of packets sent and received per second, and total number - of errors, displayed as separate graphs.
- -
- -
- s syscall     number of system calls per second.
- w swap        number of valid pages on the swap device. The swap is displayed - as a fraction of the number of swap pages configured by the machine. - -
- - The graphs are plotted with time on the horizontal axis. The vertical - axes range from 0 to 1000*sleepsecs, multiplied by the number - of processors on the machine when appropriate. The only exceptions - are memory, and swap space, which display fractions of the total - available, system load, which displays a number - between 0 and 1000, idle and intr, which display percentages and - the Ethernet error count, which goes from 0 to 10.. If the value - of the parameter is too large for the visible range, its value - is shown in decimal in the upper left corner of the graph. -
- - Upper-case options control details of the display. All graphs - are affected; there is no mechanism to affect only one graph.
- −T sleepsecs
- -
- - Set the number of seconds between samples to sleepsecs (default - one second).
- -
- −S scale
- -
- - Sets a scale factor for the displays. A value of 2, for example, - means that the highest value plotted will be twice as large as - the default.
- -
- −L    Plot all graphs with logarithmic y axes. The graph is plotted - so the maximum value that would be displayed on a linear graph - is 2/3 of the way up the y axis and the total range of the graph - is a factor of 1000; thus the y origin is 1/100 of the default - maximum value and the top of the graph is 10 times the - -
- - default maximum.
- -
- −Y    If the display is large enough to show them, place value markers - along the y axes of the graphs. Since one set of markers serves - for all machines across the display, the values in the markers - disregard scaling factors due to multiple processors on the machines. - On a graph for a multiprocessor, the displayed - -
- - values will be larger than the markers indicate. The markers appear - along the right, and the markers show values appropriate to the - rightmost machine; this only matters for graphs such as memory - that have machine-specific maxima. -
- - -
- Typing ‘q’ or DEL causes stats to exit.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Show the load, memory, interrupts, system calls, context switches, - and ethernet packets for the local machine, a remote BSD machine - daemon, and a remote Linux machine tux. Auxstats is not in tux’s - path, so the full path must be given.
- -
- - stats −lmisce `hostname` daemon \
- -
- - tux:/usr/local/plan9/bin/auxstats
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/stats.c -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/auxstats
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The auxstats binary needs read access to /dev/kmem in order to - collect network statistics on non-Linux systems. Typically this - can be arranged by setting the auxstat binary’s group to kmem - and then turning on its set-gid bit.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/strings.html b/man/man1/strings.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3b1f4eff..00000000 --- a/man/man1/strings.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - -strings(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STRINGS(1)STRINGS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - strings – extract printable strings
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - strings [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Strings finds and prints strings containing 6 or more consecutive - printable UTF-encoded characters in a (typically) binary file, - default standard input. Printable characters are taken to be ASCII - characters from blank through tilde (hexadecimal 20 through 7E), - inclusive, and all other characters from value 00A0 to FFFF. - Strings reports the decimal offset within the file at which the - string starts and the text of the string. If the string is longer - than 70 runes the line is terminated by three dots and the printing - is resumed on the next line with the offset of the continuation - line.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/strings.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - nm(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sum.html b/man/man1/sum.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2b86af65..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sum.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ - -sum(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SUM(1)SUM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sum, md5sum, sha1sum – sum and count blocks in a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sum [ −5r ] [ file ... ] -
- - md5sum [ file ... ] -
- - sha1sum [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - By default, sum calculates and prints a 32-bit hexadecimal checksum, - a byte count, and the name of each file. The checksum is also - a function of the input length. If no files are given, the standard - input is summed. Other summing algorithms are available. The options - are
- −r    Sum with the algorithm of System V’s sum −r and print the length - (in 1K blocks) of the input.
- −5    Sum with System V’s default algorithm and print the length (in - 512-byte blocks) of the input. -
- - Sum is typically used to look for bad spots, to validate a file - communicated over some transmission line or as a quick way to - determine if two files on different machines might be the same. - -
- - Md5sum computes the 32 hex digit RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest - Algorithm described in RFC1321. If no files are given, the standard - input is summed. -
- - Sha1sum computes the 40 hex digit National Institute of Standards - and Technology SHA1 secure hash algorithm described in FIPS PUB - 180-1. If no files are given, the standard input is summed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sum.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/md5sum.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sha1sum.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cmp(1), wc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tail.html b/man/man1/tail.html deleted file mode 100644 index 781f3333..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tail.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ - -tail(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TAIL(1)TAIL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tail – deliver the last part of a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tail [ +−number[lbc][rf] ] [ file ] -
- - tail [ −fr ] [ −n nlines ] [ −c nbytes ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at - a designated place. If no file is named, the standard input is - copied. -
- - Copying begins at position +number measured from the beginning, - or −number from the end of the input. Number is counted in lines, - 1K blocks or bytes, according to the appended flag l, b, or c. - Default is −10l (ten ell). -
- - The further flag r causes tail to print lines from the end of - the file in reverse order; f (follow) causes tail, after printing - to the end, to keep watch and print further data as it appears. - -
- - The second syntax is that promulgated by POSIX, where the numbers - rather than the options are signed.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - tail file
- -
- - Print the last 10 lines of a file.
- -
- tail +0f file
- -
- - Print a file, and continue to watch data accumulate as it grows.
- -
- sed 10q file
- -
- - Print the first 10 lines of a file.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tail.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Tails relative to the end of the file are treasured up in a buffer, - and thus are limited in length. -
- - According to custom, option +number counts lines from 1, and counts - blocks and bytes from 0. -
- - Tail is ignorant of UTF.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tbl.html b/man/man1/tbl.html deleted file mode 100644 index a50e8939..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tbl.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,187 +0,0 @@ - -tbl(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TBL(1)TBL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tbl – format tables for nroff or troff
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tbl [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tbl is a preprocessor for formatting tables for nroff or troff(1). - The input files are copied to the standard output, except for - segments of the form
- -
- - .TS
- options ;
- format .
- data
- .T&
- format .
- data
- . . .
- .TE
- -
- - -
- which describe tables and are replaced by troff requests to lay - out the tables. If no arguments are given, tbl reads the standard - input. -
- - The (optional) options line is terminated by a semicolon and contains - one or more of
- -
- - center        center the table; default is left-adjust
- expand        make table as wide as current line length
- box
- doublebox     enclose the table in a box or double box
- allbox        enclose every item in a box
- tab(x)        use x to separate input items; default is tab
- linesize(n)   set rules in n-point type
- delim(xy)     recognize x and y as eqn(1) delimiters
- -
- - -
- Each line, except the last, of the obligatory format describes - one row of the table. The last line describes all rows until the - next .T&, where the format changes, or the end of the table at - .TE. A format is specified by key letters, one per column, either - upper or lower case:
- -
- - L     Left justify: the default for columns without format keys.
- R     Right justify.
- C     Center.
- N     Numeric: align at decimal point (inferred for integers) or at - \&.
- S     Span: extend previous column across this one.
- A     Alphabetic: left-aligned within column, widest item centered, - indented relative to L rows.
- ^     Vertical span: continue item from previous row into this row.
- −     Draw a horizontal rule in this column.
- =     Draw a double horizontal rule in this column.
- -
- - -
- Key letters may be followed by modifiers, also either case:
- -
- - |      Draw vertical rule between columns.
- ||     Draw a double vertical rule between columns.
- n      Gap between column is n ens wide. Default is 3.
- Ffont   Use specified font. B and I mean FB and FI.
- T      Begin vertically-spanned item at top row of range; default is - vertical centering (with ^).
- Pn     Use point size n.
- Vn     Use n-point vertical spacing in text block; signed n means relative - change.
- W(n)   Column width as a troff width specification. Parens are optional - if n is a simple integer.
- E      Equalize the widths of all columns marked E.
- -
- - -
- Each line of data becomes one row of the table; tabs separate - items. Lines beginning with . are troff requests. Certain special - data items are recognized:
- -
- - _     Draw a horizontal rule in this column.
- =     Draw a double horizontal rule in this column. A data line consisting - of a single _ or = draws the rule across the whole table.
- \_    Draw a rule only as wide as the contents of the column.
- \Rx   Repeat character x across the column.
- \^    Span the previous item in this column down into this row.
- T{    The item is a text block to be separately formatted by troff - and placed in the table. The block continues to the next line - beginning with T}. The remainder of the data line follows at that - point.
- -
- - -
- When it is used in a pipeline with eqn, the tbl command should - be first, to minimize the volume of data passed through pipes.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Let <tab> represent a tab (which should be typed as a genuine tab).
- .TS
- c s s
- c c s
- c c c
- l n n.
- Household Population
- Town<tab>Households
- <tab>Number<tab>Size
- -
-Bedminster<tab>789<tab>3.26
-Bernards Twp.<tab>3087<tab>3.74
-Bernardsville<tab>2018<tab>3.30
-.TE
-
-
-
-c s s
-c c s
-c c c
-l n n.
-Household Population
-Town Households
-Number      Size
-Bedminster    789    3.26
-Bernards Twp. 3087    3.74
-Bernardsville 2018    3.30
-

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tcs.html b/man/man1/tcs.html deleted file mode 100644 index 50919607..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tcs.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ - -tcs(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TCS(1)TCS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tcs – translate character sets
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tcs [ −slcv ] [ −f ics ] [ −t ocs ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tcs interprets the named file(s) (standard input default) as a - stream of characters from the ics character set or format, converts - them to runes, and then converts them into a stream of characters - from the ocs character set or format on the standard output. The - default value for ics and ocs is utf, the UTF encoding - described in utf(7). The −l option lists the character sets known - to tcs. Processing continues in the face of conversion errors - (the −s option prevents reporting of these errors). The −c option - forces the output to contain only correctly converted characters; - otherwise, 0x80 characters will be substituted for UTF - encoding errors and 0xFFFD characters will substituted for unknown - characters. -
- - The −v option generates various diagnostic and summary information - on standard error, or makes the −l output more verbose. -
- - Tcs recognizes an ever changing list of character sets. In particular, - it supports a variety of Russian and Japanese encodings. Some - of the supported encodings are
- utf         The Plan 9 UTF encoding, known by ISO as UTF-8
- utf1        The deprecated original UTF encoding from ISO 10646
- ascii       7-bit ASCII
- 8859−1      Latin-1 (Central European)
- 8859−2      Latin-2 (Czech .. Slovak)
- 8859−3      Latin-3 (Dutch .. Turkish)
- 8859−4      Latin-4 (Scandinavian)
- 8859−5      Part 5 (Cyrillic)
- 8859−6      Part 6 (Arabic)
- 8859−7      Part 7 (Greek)
- 8859−8      Part 8 (Hebrew)
- 8859−9      Latin-5 (Finnish .. Portuguese)
- koi8        KOI-8 (GOST 19769-74)
- jis−kanji   ISO 2022-JP
- ujis        EUC-JX: JIS 0208
- ms−kanji    Microsoft, or Shift-JIS
- jis         (from only) guesses between ISO 2022-JP, EUC or Shift-Jis
- gb          Chinese national standard (GB2312-80)
- big5        Big 5 (HKU version)
- unicode     Unicode Standard 1.0
- tis         Thai character set plus ASCII (TIS 620-1986)
- msdos       IBM PC: CP 437
- atari       Atari-ST character set
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - tcs −f 8859−1
- -
- - Convert 8859-1 (Latin-1) characters into UTF format.
- -
- tcs −s −f jis
- -
- - Convert characters encoded in one of several shift JIS encodings - into UTF format. Unknown Kanji will be converted into 0xFFFD characters.
- -
- tcs −lv
- -
- - Print an up to date list of the supported character sets.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tcs
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ascii(1), rune(3), utf(7).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tee.html b/man/man1/tee.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2ece532f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tee.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ - -tee(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TEE(1)TEE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tee – pipe fitting
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tee [ −i ] [ −a ] files
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tee transcribes the standard input to the standard output and - makes copies in the files. The options are
- −i    Ignore interrupts.
- −a    Append the output to the files rather than rewriting them.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tee.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/test.html b/man/man1/test.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0f3fa85d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/test.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ - -test(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TEST(1)TEST(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - test – set status according to condition
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - test expr
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Test evaluates the expression expr. If the value is true the exit - status is null; otherwise the exit status is non-null. If there - are no arguments the exit status is non-null. -
- - The following primitives are used to construct expr.
- −r file      True if the file exists (is accessible) and is readable.
- −w file      True if the file exists and is writable.
- −x file      True if the file exists and has execute permission.
- −e file      True if the file exists.
- −f file      True if the file exists and is a plain file.
- −d file      True if the file exists and is a directory.
- −s file      True if the file exists and has a size greater than zero.
- −t fildes     True if the open file whose file descriptor number is - fildes (1 by default) is the same file as /dev/cons.
- −A file      True if the file exists and is append-only.
- −L file      True if the file exists and is exclusive-use.
- −Tfile      True if the file exists and is temporary.
- s1 = s2     True if the strings s1 and s2 are identical.
- s1 != s2    True if the strings s1 and s2 are not identical.
- s1         True if s1 is not the null string. (Deprecated.)
- −n s1       True if the length of string s1 is non-zero.
- −z s1       True if the length of string s1 is zero.
- n1 −eq n2True if the integers n1 and n2 are arithmetically equal. - Any of the comparisons −ne, −gt, −ge, −lt, or −le may be used - in place of −eq. The (nonstandard) construct −l string, meaning - the length of string, may be used in place of an integer.
- a −nt b    True if file a is newer than (modified after) file b.
- a −ot b    True if file a is older than (modified before) file b.
- f −older tTrue if file f is older than (modified before) time - t. If t is a integer followed by the letters y(years), M(months), - d(days), h(hours), m(minutes), or s(seconds), it represents current - time minus the specified time. If there is no letter, it represents - seconds since epoch. You can also concatenate mixed units. - -
- - -
- - For example, 3d12h means three days and twelve hours ago. -
- - -
- -
- These primaries may be combined with the following operators:
- !         unary negation operator
- −o        binary or operator
- −a        binary and operator; higher precedence than −o
- ( expr )   parentheses for grouping. -
- - The primitives −b, −u, −g, and −s return false; they are recognized - for compatibility with POSIX. -
- - Notice that all the operators and flags are separate arguments - to test. Notice also that parentheses and equal signs are meaningful - to rc and must be enclosed in quotes.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Test is a dubious way to check for specific character strings: - it uses a process to do what an rc(1) match or switch statement - can do. The first example is not only inefficient but wrong, because - test understands the purported string "−c" as an option.
- -
- - if (test $1 '=' "−c") echo OK # wrong!
- -
- - -
- A better way is
- -
- - if (~ $1 −c) echo OK
- -
- - -
- Test whether abc is in the current directory.
- -
- - test −f abc −o −d abc
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/test.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/time.html b/man/man1/time.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4646754f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/time.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -time(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TIME(1)TIME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - time – time a command
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - time command [ arg ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The command is executed with the given arguments; after it is - complete, time reports on standard error the program’s elapsed - user time, system time, and real time, in seconds, followed by - the command line.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/time.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - prof(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/touch.html b/man/man1/touch.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6e2f7f91..00000000 --- a/man/man1/touch.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - -touch(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TOUCH(1)TOUCH(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - touch – set modification date of a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - touch [ −c ] [ −t time ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Touch attempts to set the modification time of the files to time - (by default, the current time). If a file does not exist, it will - be created unless option −c is present.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/touch.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ls(1), stat(3), chmod(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Touch will not touch directories.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tr.html b/man/man1/tr.html deleted file mode 100644 index dc827b3f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tr.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - -tr(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TR(1)TR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tr – translate characters
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tr [ −cds ] [ string1 [ string2 ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution - or deletion of selected characters (runes). Input characters found - in string1 are mapped into the corresponding characters of string2. - When string2 is short it is padded to the length of string1 by - duplicating its last character. Any combination of the - options −cds may be used:
- −c    Complement string1: replace it with a lexicographically ordered - list of all other characters.
- −d    Delete from input all characters in string1.
- −s    Squeeze repeated output characters that occur in string2 to - single characters. -
- - In either string a noninitial sequence −x, where x is any character - (possibly quoted), stands for a range of characters: a possibly - empty sequence of codes running from the successor of the previous - code up through the code for x. The character \ followed by 1, - 2 or 3 octal digits stands for the character whose 16-bit - value is given by those digits. The character sequence \x followed - by 1, 2, 3, or 4 hexadecimal digits stands for the character whose - 16-bit value is given by those digits. A \ followed by any other - character stands for that character.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Replace all upper-case ASCII letters by lower-case.
- -
- - tr A−Z a−z <mixed >lower
- -
- - -
- Create a list of all the words in file1 one per line in file2, - where a word is taken to be a maximal string of alphabetics. String2 - is given as a quoted newline.
- -
- - tr −cs A−Za−z '
- ' <file1 >file2
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tr.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sed(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tr2post.html b/man/man1/tr2post.html deleted file mode 100644 index 808c329b..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tr2post.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,152 +0,0 @@ - -tr2post(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TR2POST(1)TR2POST(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tr2post – convert troff intermediate to PostScript
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tr2post [ options ] [ files ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tr2post converts files (or standard input), which should be the - device-independent output of troff(1), into the PostScript printer - language. -
- - The options are:
- −a aspectratio
- -
- - Set an aspect ratio (y/x) to stretch the PostScript output (default - 1.0).
- -
- −c copies
- -
- - Set a comment in the PostScript output marking the number of copies - that should be printed. The comment is intended for ancient versions - of the Unix lp(1) and is not recognized by any current printer - or print spooler.
- -
- −d    Emit volumes of debugging output on standard error.
- −m magnification
- -
- - Magnify the PostScript output (default 1.0).
- -
- −n formsperpage
- -
- - Print the PostScript with formsperpage logical pages per physical - page (default 1). Using this option emits PostScript with invalid - document structuring comments. It will print fine but will not - view correctly in gv(1) or psv (see page(1)).
- -
- −o pagelist
- -
- - Print only the pages in the pagelist, which is a comma-separated - list of ranges. Each range is of the form p (just page p), p−q - (pages p through q), −p (pages 1 through p), or p− (pages p through - the end of the document).
- -
- −p l   Print the document in landscape mode. An argument that does - not begin with l will print the document in portrait mode.
- −x xoffset
- -
- - Translate the page output by xoffset inches to the right. (Negative - offsets translate to the left.)
- -
- −y yoffset
- -
- - Translate the page output by yoffset inches down. (Negative offsets - translate up.)
- -
- −P pscode
- -
- - Emit the text pscode at the end of the usual PostScript header.
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Preview this manual page:
- -
- - troff −man /usr/local/plan9/man/man1/tr2post.1 |
- tr2post |
- psfonts >/tmp/a.ps
- psv /tmp/a.ps
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/postscript/tr2post
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), psfonts(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/troff.html b/man/man1/troff.html deleted file mode 100644 index a3d8477f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/troff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ - -troff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TROFF(1)TROFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - troff, nroff – text formatting and typesetting
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - troff [ option ... ] [ file ... ] -
- - nroff [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Troff formats text in the named files for printing on a typesetter. - Nroff does the same, but produces output suitable for typewriter-like - devices. -
- - If no file argument is present, the standard input is read. An - argument consisting of a single minus (−) is taken to be a file - name corresponding to the standard input. The options are:
- −olist   Print pages in the comma-separated list of numbers and ranges. - A range N−M means N through M; initial −M means up to M; final - N− means from N to the end.
- −nN     Number first generated page N.
- −mnameProcess the macro file /sys/lib/tmac/tmac.name before the - input files.
- −raN    Set register a (one character name) to N.
- −i      Read standard input after the input files are exhausted.
- −q      Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the rd request.
- −N      Produce output suitable for typewriter-like devices.
-

Typesetter devices (not −N) only
- −a      Send a printable textual approximation of the results to the - standard output.
- −Tdest   Prepare output for typesetter dest:
- -
- - -
- - −Tutf     (The default.) PostScript printers with preprocessing to - handle Unicode characters encoded in UTF
- −Tpost    Regular PostScript printers
- −T202     Mergenthaler Linotron 202
- -
- -
- −Fdir   Take font information from directory dir.
-

Typewriter (−N) output only
- −sN     Halt prior to every N pages (default N=1) to allow paper loading - or changing.
- −TnamePrepare output for specified terminal. Known names include - utf for the normal Plan 9 UTF encoding of the Unicode Standard - character set (default), 37 for the Teletype model 37, lp (‘line-printer’) - for any terminal without half-line capability, 450 for the DASI-450 - (Diablo Hyterm), and think (HP ThinkJet). - −e      Produce equally-spaced words in adjusted lines, using full terminal - resolution.
- −h      Use output tabs during horizontal spacing to speed output and - reduce output character count. Tab settings are assumed to be - every 8 nominal character widths.
- -

-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/trtmp*                   temporary file
- /usr/local/plan9/tmac/tmac.*    standard macro files
- /usr/local/plan9/troff/term/*   terminal driving tables for nroff
- /usr/local/plan9/troff/font/*   font width tables for troff
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/troff
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - lpr(1), proof(1), tr2post(1), eqn(1), tbl(1), pic(1), grap(1), - doctype(1), ms(7), image(7), tex(1), deroff(1)
- J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, “Troff User’s Manual”
- B. W. Kernighan, “A TROFF Tutorial”, Unix Research System Programmer’s - Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/troff2html.1 b/man/man1/troff2html.1 index 01bd0681..a40e22f0 100644 --- a/man/man1/troff2html.1 +++ b/man/man1/troff2html.1 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ which converts .IR man (1) pages into HTML and depends on a specially annotated set of -.IR man (6) +.IR man (7) macros, invoked by .B troff .BR -manhtml . @@ -63,7 +63,8 @@ pointing to .PP .I Troff2html is new and experimental; in time, it may improve and subsume -.IR ms2html (1). +Plan 9's +\fIms2html\fR(1). On the one hand, because it uses the input, .B ms2html can handle @@ -74,7 +75,7 @@ etc., which does not handle at all; on the other hand, .B ms2html understands only -.IR ms (6) +.IR ms (7) documents and is easily confused by complex .B troff constructions. @@ -83,10 +84,12 @@ has the reverse properties: it does not handle the preprocessors but its output is reliable and (modulo helper annotations) is independent of macro package. .SH SEE ALSO .IR troff (1), -.IR ms2html (1), -.B man2html +Plan 9's +\fIms2html\fR(1), +.I man2html in -.IR httpd (8). +Plan 9's +\fIhttpd\fR(8). .SH BUGS .B Troff and HTML have different models, and they don't mesh well in all cases. diff --git a/man/man1/troff2html.html b/man/man1/troff2html.html deleted file mode 100644 index 77dff2d7..00000000 --- a/man/man1/troff2html.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ - -troff2html(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TROFF2HTML(1)TROFF2HTML(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - troff2html – convert troff output into HTML
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - troff2html [ −t title ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Troff2html reads the troff(1) output in the named files, default - standard input, and converts them into HTML. -
- - Troff2html does a tolerable job with straight troff output, but - it is helped by annotations, described below. Its main use is - for man2html (see Plan 9’s httpd(8)), which converts man(1) pages - into HTML and depends on a specially annotated set of man(6) macros, - invoked by troff −manhtml. -
- - Troff output lines beginning
- -
- - x X html ...
- -
- - -
- which are introduced by placing \X'html ...' in the input, cause - the rest of the line to be interpolated into the HTML produced. - Several such lines are recognized specially by troff2html. The - most important are the pair
- -
- - x X html manref start cp 1
- x X html manref end cp 1
- -
- - -
- which are used to create HTML hyperlinks around text of the form - cp(1) pointing to /magic/man2html/1/cp. -
- - Troff2html is new and experimental; in time, it may improve and - subsume ms2html(1). On the one hand, because it uses the input, - ms2html can handle pic(1), eqn(1), etc., which troff2html does - not handle at all; on the other hand, ms2html understands only - ms(6) documents and is easily confused by complex - troff constructions. Troff2html has the reverse properties: it - does not handle the preprocessors but its output is reliable and - (modulo helper annotations) is independent of macro package.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), ms2html(1), man2html in httpd(8).
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Troff and HTML have different models, and they don’t mesh well - in all cases. Troff’s indented paragraphs are not well served - in HTML, and the output of troff2html shows this.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tweak.html b/man/man1/tweak.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9d63dcd4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tweak.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ - -tweak(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TWEAK(1)TWEAK(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tweak – edit image files, subfont files, face files, etc.
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tweak [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tweak edits existing files holding various forms of images. To - create original images, start from an existing image, subfont, - etc. -
- - Tweak reads its argument files and displays the resulting images - in a vertical column. If the image is too wide to fit across the - display, it is folded much like a long line of text in an rio - window. Under each image is displayed one or two lines of text - presenting its parameters. The first line shows the image’s depth, - the number of bits per pixel; r, the rectangle covered by the - image; and the name of the file from which it was read. If the - file is a subfont, a second line presents a hexadecimal 16-bit - offset to be applied to character values from the subfont (typically - as stored in a font file; see font(7)); and the subfont’s n, - height, and ascent as defined in cachechars(3). -
- - By means described below, magnified views of portions of the images - may be displayed. The text associated with such a view includes - mag, the magnification. If the view is of a single character from - a subfont, the second line of text shows the character’s value - (including the subfont’s offset) in hexadecimal and as a - character in tweak’s default font; the character’s x, top, bottom, - left, and width as defined in cachechars(3); and iwidth, the physical - width of the image in the subfont’s image. -
- - There are two methods to obtain a magnified view of a character - from a subfont. The first is to click mouse button 1 over the - image of the character in the subfont. The second is to select - the char entry on the button 3 menu, point the resulting gunsight - cursor at the desired subfont and click button 3, and then type - at the text prompt at the bottom of the screen the character value, - either as a multi-digit hexadecimal number or as a single rune - representing the character. -
- - To magnify a portion of other types of image files, click button - 1 over the unmagnified file. The cursor will switch to a cross. - Still with button 1, sweep a rectangle, as in rio, that encloses - the portion of the image to be magnified. (If the file is 16x16 - or smaller, tweak will just magnify the entire file; no sweeping - is - necessary.) -
- - Pressing buttons 1 and 2 within magnified images changes pixel - values. By default, button 1 sets the pixel to all zeros and button - 2 sets the pixel to all ones. -
- - Across the top of the screen is a textual display of global parameters. - These values, as well as many of the textual values associated - with the images, may be edited by clicking button 1 on the displayed - value and typing a new value. The values along the top of the - screen are:
- mag   Default magnification.
- val(hex)
- -
- - The value used to modify pixels within magnified images. The value - must be in hexadecimal, optionally preceded by a tilde for bitwise - negation.
- -
- but1
- but2The pixel value written when the corresponding button is pressed - over a pixel.
- invert−on−copy
- -
- - Whether the pixel values are inverted when a copy operation is - performed. -
- - -
- Under button 3 is a menu holding a variety of functions. Many - of these functions prompt for the image upon which to act by switching - to a gunsight cursor; click button 3 over the selection, or click - a different button to cancel the action.
- openRead and display a file. The name of the file is typed to - the prompt on the bottom line.
- readReread a file.
- write
- -
- - Write a file.
- -
- copyUse the copy function, default S, to transfer a rectangle - of pixels from one image to another. The program prompts with - a cross cursor; sweep out a rectangle in one image or just click - button 3 to select the whole image. The program will leave that - rectangle in place and attach another one to the cursor. Move - -
- - that rectangle to the desired place in any image and click button - 3, or another button to cancel the action.
- -
- charAs described above, open a magnified view of a character image - in a subfont.
- pixels
- -
- - Report the coordinate and value of individual pixels indicated - by pressing button 3. This is a mode of operation canceled by - pressing button 1 or 2.
- -
- close
- -
- - Close the specified image. If the image is the unmagnified file, - also close any magnified views of that file.
- -
- exitQuit tweak. The program will complain once about modified - but unwritten files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/tweak.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cachechars(3), image(7), font(7)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - For a program written to adjust width tables in fonts, tweak has - been pushed unreasonably far.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/uniq.html b/man/man1/uniq.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7f0e4377..00000000 --- a/man/man1/uniq.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -uniq(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
UNIQ(1)UNIQ(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - uniq – report repeated lines in a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - uniq [ −udc [ +−num ] ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Uniq copies the input file, or the standard input, to the standard - output, comparing adjacent lines. In the normal case, the second - and succeeding copies of repeated lines are removed. Repeated - lines must be adjacent in order to be found.
- −u    Print unique lines.
- −d    Print (one copy of) duplicated lines.
- −c    Prefix a repetition count and a tab to each output line. Implies - −u and −d.
- −numThe first num fields together with any blanks before each - are ignored. A field is defined as a string of non-space, non-tab - characters separated by tabs and spaces from its neighbors.
- +numThe first num characters are ignored. Fields are skipped before - characters.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/uniq.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Field selection and comparison should be compatible with sort(1).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/units.html b/man/man1/units.html deleted file mode 100644 index fed0c287..00000000 --- a/man/man1/units.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ - -units(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
UNITS(1)UNITS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - units – conversion program
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - units [ −v ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales - to their equivalents in other scales. It works interactively in - this fashion:
- -
- - you have: inch
- you want: cm
- -
- - * 2.54
- / 0.393701
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of units - and floating point numbers. Operators have the following precedence:
- -
- - + −             add and subtract
- * / x ÷           multiply and divide
- catenation         multiply
- ² ³ ^            exponentiation
- |               divide
- ( ... )            grouping
- -
- - -
- Most familiar units, abbreviations, and metric prefixes are recognized, - together with a generous leavening of exotica and a few constants - of nature including:
- -
- - pi,π      ratio of circumference to diameter
- c         speed of light
- e         charge on an electron
- g         acceleration of gravity
- force     same as g
- mole      Avogadro’s number
- water     pressure head per unit height of water
- au        astronomical unit
- -
- - -
- The pound is a unit of mass. Compound names are run together, - e.g. lightyear. British units that differ from their US counterparts - are prefixed thus: brgallon. Currency is denoted belgiumfranc, - britainpound, etc. -
- - The complete list of units can be found in /usr/local/plan9/lib/units. - A file argument to units specifies a file to be used instead of - /usr/local/plan9/lib/units. The −v flag causes units to print - its entire database.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - you have: 15 pounds force/in²
- you want: atm
- -
- - * 1.02069
- / .97973
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/units
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/units.y
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Since units does only multiplicative scale changes, it can convert - Kelvin to Rankine but not Centigrade to Fahrenheit. -
- - Currency conversions are only as accurate as the last time someone - updated the database.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/vac.html b/man/man1/vac.html deleted file mode 100644 index 71f121ff..00000000 --- a/man/man1/vac.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ - -vac(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
VAC(1)VAC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - vac – create a vac archive on Venti
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - vac [ −mqsv ] [ −b blocksize ] [ −d oldvacfile ] [ −e exclude - ] [ −f vacfile ] [ −i name ] [ −h host ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Vac creates an archival copy of Plan 9 file trees on Venti. It - can be used to build a simple backup system. One of the unusual - properties of Venti is that duplicate blocks are detected and - coalesced. When vac is used on a file tree that shares data with - an existing archive, the consumption of storage will be approximately - equal to an incremental backup. This reduction in storage consumption - occurs transparently to the user. -
- - As an optimization, the −d and −q options, described below, can - be used to explicitly create an archive relative to an existing - archive. These options do not change the resulting archive generated - by vac, but simply reduce the number of write operations to Venti. - -
- - The output of vac is the hexadecimal representation of the Sha1 - fingerprint of the root of the archive, in this format:
- -
- - vac:64daefaecc4df4b5cb48a368b361ef56012a4f46
- -
- - -
- Option to vac are:
- −b blocksize
- -
- - Specifies the block size that data will be broken into. The units - for the size can be specified by appending k to indicate kilobytes. - The default is 8k. The size must be in the range of 512 bytes - to 52k.
- -
- −d oldvacfile
- -
- - Reduce the number of blocks written to Venti by comparing the - files to be stored with the contents of an existing vac file tree - given by oldvacfile.
- -
- −e exclude
- -
- - Do not include the file or directory specified by exclude. This - option may be repeated multiple times.
- -
- −f vacfile
- -
- - The results of vac are place in vacfile, or the standard output - if no file is given.
- -
- −i name
- -
- - Include standard input as one of the input files, storing it in - the archive with the specified name.
- -
- −h host
- -
- - The network address of the Venti server. The default is taken - from the environment variable venti.
- -
- −m    Expand and merge any vac archives that are found while reading - the input files. This option is useful for building an archive - from a collection of existing archives. Each archive is inserted - into the new archive as if it had been unpacked in the directory - in which it was found. Multiple archives can be unpacked in - -
- - a single directory and the contents will be merged. To be detected, - the archives must end in .vac. Note, an archive is inserted by - simply copying the root fingerprint and does not require the archive - to be unpacked.
- -
- −q    Increase the performance of the −d option by detecting unchanged - files based on a match of the files name and other meta data, - rather than examining the contents of the files.
- −s    Print out various statistics on standard error.
- −v    Produce more verbose output on standard error, including the - name of the files added to the archive and the vac archives that - are expanded and merged.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/vac
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - Plan 9’s vacfs(4) and venti(8)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/wc.html b/man/man1/wc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 677c2937..00000000 --- a/man/man1/wc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ - -wc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WC(1)WC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - wc – word count
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - wc [ −lwrbc ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Wc counts lines, words, runes, syntactically-invalid UTF codes - and bytes in the named files, or in the standard input if no file - is named. A word is a maximal string of characters delimited by - spaces, tabs or newlines. The count of runes includes invalid - codes. -
- - If the optional argument is present, just the specified counts - (lines, words, runes, broken UTF codes or bytes) are selected - by the letters l, w, r, b, or c. Otherwise, lines, words and bytes - (−lwc) are reported.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/wc.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The Unicode Standard has many blank characters scattered through - it, but wc looks for only ASCII space, tab and newline. -
- - Wc should have options to count suboptimal UTF codes and bytes - that cannot occur in any UTF code.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/web.html b/man/man1/web.html deleted file mode 100644 index cb0ad0b4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/web.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ - -web(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WEB(1)WEB(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - web, wmail – handle web page, mail message for plumber
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - web url ...
- wmail address
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Web opens each of the named urls in a new web browser window. - Any of the urls may be relative paths to files in the file system; - they will be translated into file:// URLs before being passed - to the web browser. -
- - Web uses the web browser’s −remote option command-line option, - which requires an instance of the web browser to be already running. - The choice of browser is determined by the $BROWSER environment - variable, which should be the name of the executable for your - choice of web browser. The default is - firefox. Since the various browsers all use different syntaxes - in their −remote options, the executable name is inspected to - determine the type of browser. The supported browsers are Opera, - Mozilla Firefox, Mozilla Firebird, and Mozilla. When possible, - web opens each URL in a new tab rather than a new window. - -
- - When run under Mac OS X, $BROWSER should be set to the string - safari or firefox. Web uses AppleScript to talk to the browser. - If $BROWSER is not set, web looks for Firefox in /Applications/Firefox.app - and uses it if found; otherwise it uses Safari. -
- - Wmail starts the composition of a new mail message to address. - -
- - The choice of mailer is determined by the $MAILER environment - variable. The supported mailers are:
- browser
- -
- - invoke the mailer via a mailto:// URL passed to web -
- - -
- Web and wmail are invoked as start commands in the plumber(4)’s - rules for opening web pages and writing mail messages.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/plumb/basic
- -
- - plumbing rules using web and wmail
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumber(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/wintext.html b/man/man1/wintext.html deleted file mode 100644 index d4de3349..00000000 --- a/man/man1/wintext.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ - -wintext(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WINTEXT(1)WINTEXT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - wintext, ", "" – access text in current window
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - wintext
- ?? [ prefix ]
- ???? [ prefix ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Wintext prints the text of the current win (see acme(1)) or 9term(1) - window to standard output. -
- - ?? searches the window text for commands typed with a particular - prefix and prints them, indented, to standard output. Prefix is - a regular expression that is matched against the beginning of - the command-line. If prefix is omitted, ?? prints the last command - executed. ???? prints the last command that ?? would print and - then executes it by piping it into rc(1). -
- - Both ?? and ???? identify commands in the window text by looking for - lines beginning with a shell prompt. Prompts are assumed to be - an unindented sequence of non-whitespace characters followed by - one of the characters %, ;, $, or #.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Print the ls(1) and lc commands executed in this window:
- -
- - % ?? 'l[sc]'
- -
- - % ls −l /tmp/qq*
- # ls −lrt /etc
- % lc r*
- -
- %
- -
- - -
- Execute the most recent lc command again:
- -
- - % ???? lc
- -
- - % lc r*
- -
- ramfs     rc        read      rio       rm
- %
- -
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), acme(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - ?? and ???? are hard to type in shells other than rc(1).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/xd.html b/man/man1/xd.html deleted file mode 100644 index 86e6152e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/xd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -xd(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
XD(1)XD(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - xd – hex, octal, decimal, or ASCII dump
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - xd [ option ... ] [ −format ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Xd concatenates and dumps the files (standard input by default) - in one or more formats. Groups of 16 bytes are printed in each - of the named formats, one format per line. Each line of output - is prefixed by its address (byte offset) in the input file. The - first line of output for each group is zero-padded; subsequent - are - blank-padded. -
- - Formats other than −c are specified by pairs of characters telling - size and style, 4x by default. The sizes are
- 1 or b   1-byte units.
- 2 or w   2-byte big-endian units.
- 4 or l   4-byte big-endian units.
- 8 or v   8-byte big-endian units. -
- - The styles are
- o     Octal.
- x     Hexadecimal.
- d     Decimal. -
- - Other options are
- −c      Format as 1x but print ASCII representations or C escape sequences - where possible.
- −astyle   Print file addresses in the given style (and size 4).
- −u      (Unbuffered) Flush the output buffer after each 16-byte sequence.
- −s      Reverse (swab) the order of bytes in each group of 4 before - printing.
- −r      Print repeating groups of identical 16-byte sequences as the - first group followed by an asterisk.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/xd.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - db(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The various output formats don’t line up properly in the output - of xd.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/yacc.html b/man/man1/yacc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1a485ce6..00000000 --- a/man/man1/yacc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - -yacc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
YACC(1)YACC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - yacc – yet another compiler-compiler
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - yacc [ option ... ] grammar
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Yacc converts a context-free grammar and translation code into - a set of tables for an LR(1) parser and translator. The grammar - may be ambiguous; specified precedence rules are used to break - ambiguities. -
- - The output file, y.tab.c, must be compiled by the C compiler to - produce a program yyparse. This program must be loaded with a - lexical analyzer function, yylex(void) (often generated by lex(1)), - with a main(int    argc,    char    *argv[]) program, and with an error - handling routine, - yyerror(char*). -
- - The options are
- −o output   Direct output to the specified file instead of y.tab.c.
- −Dn       Create file y.debug, containing diagnostic messages. To incorporate - them in the parser, compile it with preprocessor symbol yydebug - defined. The amount of diagnostic output from the parser is regulated - by value n. The value 0 reports errors; 1 reports reductions; - higher values (up to 4) include - -
- - -
- - more information about state transitions.
- -
- -
- −v        Create file y.output, containing a description of the parsing - tables and of conflicts arising from ambiguities in the grammar.
- −d        Create file y.tab.h, containing #define statements that associate - yacc-assigned ‘token codes’ with user-declared ‘token names’. - Include it in source files other than y.tab.c to give access to - the token codes.
- −s stem     Change the prefix y of the file names y.tab.c, y.tab.h, - y.debug, and y.output to stem.
- −S        Write a parser that uses Stdio instead of the print routines - in libc. -
- - The specification of yacc itself is essentially the same as the - UNIX version described in the references mentioned below. Besides - the −D option, the main relevant differences are:
- -
- - The interface to the C environment is by default through <libc.h> - rather than <stdio.h>; the −S option reverses this.
- The parser accepts UTF input text (see utf(7)), which has a couple - of effects. First, the return value of yylex() no longer fits - in a short; second, the starting value for non-terminals is now - 0xE000 rather than 257.
- The generated parser can be recursive: actions can call yyparse, - for example to implement a sort of #include statement in an interpreter.
- Finally, some undocumented inner workings of the parser have been - changed, which may affect programs that know too much about its - structure.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - y.output
- y.tab.c
- y.tab.h
- y.debug
- y.tmp.*         temporary file
- y.acts.*        temporary file
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/yaccpar
- -
- - -
- - parser prototype
- -
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/yaccpars
- -
- - -
- - parser prototype using stdio
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/yacc.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - lex(1)
- S. C. Johnson and R. Sethi, “Yacc: A parser generator”, Unix Research - System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2
- B. W. Kernighan and Rob Pike, The UNIX Programming Environment, - Prentice Hall, 1984
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The parser may not have full information when it writes to y.debug - so that the names of the tokens returned by yylex may be missing.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - -- cgit v1.2.3